Contents
Safety Information and Introduction ............2
AV RECEIVER
Table of Contents...........................................6
Connections .................................................12
Turning On & Basic Operations..................21
Playback........................................................29
Advanced Operations ..................................52
Controlling Other Components...................76
Appendix.......................................................82
TX-NR727
Instruction Manual
Internet Radio Guide
Remote Control Codes
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
interference in a residential installation. This
extended period, remove the power cord from the
AC outlet.
5. Preventing Hearing Loss
Precautions
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
–Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
–Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
–Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal
use only, recording copyrighted material is illegal
without the permission of the copyright holder.
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact
your Onkyo dealer.
Caution
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure
Warning
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine,
fire or the like.
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a
soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild
detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately
afterwards with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive
cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical
solvents, because they may damage the finish or
remove the panel lettering.
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo
dealer.
8. Handling Notes
4. Power
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original
packaging to pack it how it was when you
originally bought it.
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit
for a long time, because they may leave marks
on the case.
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm
after prolonged use. This is normal.
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so
be sure to use it occasionally.
WARNING
–Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION
CAREFULLY.
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear
panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this
unit from the AC power source. Make sure that
the plug is readily operable (easily accessible) at
all times.
For U.S. and Canadian models
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For models with [POWER] button, or with both
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF
mode does not fully disconnect from the mains. If
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.
compromettre le fonctionnement.
Note:
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against harmful
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an
En-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
RF Exposure Compliance
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
Modèle pour les Canadien
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME
NMB-003 DU CANADA.
IMPORTANT
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the
same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the
body of the fuse.
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable
fuse in the plug.
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65
and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more
away from person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE
CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQU’AU FOND.
For British models
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the
power supply cord of this unit should be performed
only by qualified service personnel.
For European Models
Declaration of Conformity
We declare, under our sole
responsibility, that this product
complies with the standards:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition
aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement
non contrôlé et respecte les régles les
radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices
d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et
d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie
RF trés faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé
en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le
dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in
accordance with the following code:
Blue: Neutral
–Safety
–Limits and methods of
measurement of radio disturbance characteristics
–Limits for harmonic current emissions
–Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations
and flicker
–RoHS Directive, 2011/65/EU
–Hereby, Onkyo Corporation, declares that this
TX-NR727 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured black.
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured red.
For Canadian Models
–С настоящето, Onkyo Corporation, декларира, че
TX-NR727 е в съответствие със съществените
изисквания и другитеприложими разпоредби на
Директива 1999/5/EC.
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.
For models having a power cord with a polarized
plug:
–Onkyo Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že TX-NR727
splňuje základní požadavky a všechna příslušná
ustanoveni Směrnice 1999/5/ES.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,
FULLY INSERT.
–Undertegnede Onkyo Corporation erklærer herved,
at følgende udstyr TX-NR727 overholder de
væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv
1999/5/EF.
En-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
–Hiermit erklärt Onkyo Corporation, dass sich das
Gerät TX-NR727 in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen
einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie
1999/5/EG befindet.
essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalin-
gen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
23764/SDPPI/2012
2371
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA106032
–Niniejszym Onkyo Corporation deklaruje że
TX-NR727 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymaganiami i innymi właściwymi
TA-20120424004
TRA
–Käesolevaga kinnitab Onkyo Corporation seadme
TX-NR727 vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele
teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
REGISTERED No
ER0086260/12
–Eu, Onkyo Corporation, declaro que o TX-NR727
cumpre os requisitos essenciais e outras provisões
relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC.
527090
No
–ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Ο ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ Onkyo
Corporation ∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ TX-NR727
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ
ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ
∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ
–Prin prezenta, Onkyo Corporation, declară că
aparatul TX-NR727 este în conformitate cu
cerinţele esenţiale şi cu alte prevederi pertinente
ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV
Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly
before making connections and plugging in the
Following the instructions in this manual will
enable you to obtain optimum performance and
listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.
Please retain this manual for future reference.
–Onkyo Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že TX-NR727
a spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
–Por la presente, Onkyo Corporation, declara que
este TX-NR727 cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y otras exigencias relevantes de la
Directiva 1999/5/EC.
–Onkyo Corporation izjavlja, da je ta TX-NR727 v
skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in drugimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
–Par la présente, Onkyo Corporation déclare que
l’appareil TX-NR727 est conforme aux exigences
essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes
de la directive 1999/5/CE.
–Onkyo Corporation vakuuttaa täten että TX-NR727
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden
ehtojen mukainen.
Supplied Accessories
–Con la presente Onkyo Corporation dichiara che
questo TX-NR727 è conforme ai requisiti essenziali
ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla
direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Make sure you have the following accessories:
–Härmed förklarar Onkyo Corporation att denna
TX-NR727 följer de väsentliga kraven och andra
relevanta stadgar i Direktiv 1999/5/EC.
Indoor FM antenna (➔ page 19)
AM loop antenna (➔ page 19)
Power cord (European and Taiwanese models)
(➔ page 21)
–Ar šo Onkyo Corporation deklarē, ka TX-NR727
atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām
un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
–Hér með lýsir Onkyo Corporation því yfir að varan
TX-NR727 er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Speaker cable labels (➔ page 12)
Speaker setup microphone (➔ page 25)
Remote controller (RC-868M) and two batteries (AA/R6)
Quick Start Guide
–Šiuo Onkyo Corporation deklaruoja, kad šis
TX-NR727 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
–Onkyo Corporation erklærer herved at denne
TX-NR727 er i overensstemmelse med vesentlige
krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i direktiv
1999/5/EC.
*
–A Onkyo Corporation ezzennel kijelenti, hogy a
TX-NR727 típusú beren-dezés teljesíti az alapvető
követelményeket és más 1999/5/EK irányelvben
meghatározott vonatkozó rendelkezéseket.
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the
product name indicates the color. Specifications and
operations are the same regardless of color.
–Hierbij verklaart Onkyo Corporation dat het toestel
l TX-NR727 in overeenstemming is met de
En-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Initial Setup .................................................................22
Selecting the Language
Table of Contents
Advanced Operations
for the On-screen Setup Menus.............................22
Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup .................................22
Source Connection ...................................................23
Remote Mode Setup.................................................23
Network Connection .................................................23
Terminating the Initial Setup.....................................23
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup.........................24
Performing Wireless LAN Setup...............................27
On-screen Setup......................................................... 52
Using the Quick Setup.............................................. 52
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup.................. 53
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)................................ 56
Setup Menu Items .................................................... 56
1. Input/Output Assign.............................................. 57
2. Speaker Setup...................................................... 59
3. Audio Adjust ......................................................... 62
4. Source Setup........................................................ 64
5. Listening Mode Preset.......................................... 68
6. Miscellaneous....................................................... 69
7. Hardware Setup.................................................... 69
8. Remote Controller Setup...................................... 73
9. Lock Setup............................................................ 73
Multi Zone ................................................................... 74
Making Multi Zone Connections ............................... 74
Controlling Multi Zone Components ......................... 75
Safety Information and Introduction
Important Safety Instructions......................................2
Precautions ...................................................................3
Supplied Accessories...................................................5
Table of Contents..........................................................6
Features.........................................................................7
Front & Rear Panels......................................................8
Front Panel..................................................................8
Rear Panel ................................................................10
Remote Controller.......................................................11
Controlling the AV Receiver......................................11
Playback
Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices.....30
Understanding Icons on the Display.........................31
Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device ....31
Playing a USB Device...............................................32
Listening to TuneIn ...................................................32
Registering Other Internet Radio..............................34
Changing the Icon Layout
on the Network Service Screen..............................34
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA) ..................34
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder ...................36
Remote Playback......................................................37
Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................38
Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources.....40
Using the Listening Modes .......................................41
Displaying Source Information..................................49
Using the Sleep Timer ..............................................49
Setting the Display Brightness..................................49
Changing the Input Display.......................................50
Muting the AV Receiver............................................50
Using the Whole House Mode..................................50
Using the Home Menu..............................................51
Connections
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................12
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................12
Connecting the TV/AV components..........................15
About RIHD-compatible components........................16
Operations that can be performed
with RIHD connection.............................................17
Confirm the settings ..................................................17
Connection Tips ........................................................17
Connecting the Antennas..........................................19
Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................20
Using Headphones....................................................20
Controlling Other Components
Controlling Other Components................................. 76
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes.................. 76
Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 76
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 76
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 77
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo Components
Connected via RI ................................................... 77
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons................... 77
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 77
Controlling Other Components................................. 78
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 80
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 81
Turning On & Basic Operations
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver................................21
Connecting the Power Cord......................................21
Turning On ................................................................21
Turning Off ................................................................21
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator....................22
Appendix
Troubleshooting......................................................... 82
Firmware Update ........................................................ 90
About HDMI................................................................. 93
Network/USB Features............................................... 94
License and Trademark Information ........................ 96
Specifications............................................................. 97
To reset the AV receiver, see page 82.
En-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Connections
Features
• 8 HDMI Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs
Amplifier
*
• 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough )-compatible HDMI
Inputs
• 110 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)
• 170 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)
• 185 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)
• WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology
(5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth)
• Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive
High Power Transformer
* Compatible with HDMI IN 1 to HDMI IN 4 only
• Onkyo pfor System Control
• 3 Digital Inputs (1 Optical/2 Coaxial)
• Component Video Switching (1 Input/1 Output)
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts
*
In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an
audio amplifier is prohibited.
• Powered Zone 2
• Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with SBL/SBR
• Internet Radio Connectivity
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files
• Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Connectivity
• Wireless Music Playback via Bluetooth
• Front-Panel USB Input for Memory Devices
• MHL-Enabled AUX Front Input
• 3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design
Processing
• THX Select2 Plus Certified
• Incorporates Qdeo™ technology for HDMI Video
Upscaling (to 4K Compatible)
• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, 4K (up-scaling and
Passthrough), DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DSD and Multi-CH PCM)
Miscellaneous
• 40 FM/AM Presets
®
• Audyssey MultEQ to correct room acoustic
• Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio
problems
®
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz and Audyssey DSX
®
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ for loudness correction
• Non-Scaling Configuration
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory
• Direct Mode
• Pure Audio Mode (European, Australian and Asian
models)
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files
• Phase Matching Bass System
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters
• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing
DSP
®
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume to maintain optimal
listening level and dynamic range
• Crossover Adjustment
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)
• Auto Standby Function
• On-Screen Display via HDMI
• Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote
• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology
En-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Front & Rear Panels
Front Panel
(North American and Taiwanese models)
(European, Australian and Asian models)
a
bcde f g
h i j k l m
n
o
x
o p q r
s
w
t u v
y
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
i MEMORY button (38)
s Input selector buttons (29)
t DISPLAY button (49)
u USB port (32)
j TUNING MODE button (38)
a 8ON/STANDBY button (21)
k HOME button (51)
b MUSIC OPTIMIZER button (North American
v SETUP MIC jack (25)
w HYBRID STANDBY indicator (22)
and Taiwanese models) (54)
and ENTER buttons
c ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 buttons (50, 75)
d Wi-Fi indicator (27)
m RETURN button
x RT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and
Asian models) (39)
e Remote control sensor (11)
f Display (9)
49)
y PURE AUDIO button and indicator (European,
o BLUETOOTH button and indicator (31, 73)
p PHONES jack (20)
Australian and Asian models) (41)
g LISTENING MODE buttons (41)
h DIMMER button (North American and
q AUX INPUT HDMI/MHL jack (16)
r TONE and Tone Level buttons (53)
Taiwanese models) (49)
En-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Display
s
abcde
f
g h
i
j
k l m n k e
o
p q r
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
i Tuning indicators
p SLEEP indicator (49)
q Channel/Unit indicators
ch indicator
RDS indicator (excluding North American and
Taiwanese models) (39)
a Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (75)
AUTO indicator (38)
TUNED indicator (38)
b Z3 (Zone 3) indicator (75)
Hz indicator
c 3D indicator
m/ft indicator
k Input indicators (18)
HDMI indicator (70)
This lights when a 3D input signal is detected.
dB indicator
d Headphone indicator (20)
r ASb (Auto Standby) indicator (71)
e 1, 3and cursor indicators (32)
f Listening mode and format indicators (41, 68)
g Audyssey indicator (24, 64)
Audyssey DSX indicator (45)
DIGITAL indicator
Dynamic EQ indicator (64)
o Message area
Dynamic Vol indicator (64)
h M.Opt (Music Optimizer) indicator (54)
En-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
Rear Panel
(North American, Australian and Asian models)
(European and Taiwanese models)
f
a
b c
d
e
g
n
hi
j
k
l m
See “Connecting Your Speakers” for connection
(➔ pages 12 to 20).
g Power cord (North American, Australian and
Asian models)
a u REMOTE CONTROL jack
b COMPONENT VIDEO IN and OUT jacks
c ETHERNET port
h DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks
i GND screw
j Composite video and analog audio jacks
d FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal
(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, STB/DVR IN, GAME
IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN, PHONO IN)
e HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB) jacks
k MONITOR OUT V jack
f SPEAKERS terminals
m ZONE 2/ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks
n AC INLET (European and Taiwanese models)
(CENTER, FRONT, SURROUND, SURROUND
BACK or FRONT HIGH, ZONE 2)
En-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Information and Introduction
■ Aiming the remote controller
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.
For detailed information, see the pages in
parentheses.
Remote Controller
a 8RECEIVER button (21)
Controlling the AV Receiver
b REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons
Remote control sensor
AV receiver
(29)
To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to
select Receiver mode.
c q/w/e/rand ENTER buttons
d Q SETUP button (52)
e Listening Mode buttons (41)
f DIMMER button (49)
g DISPLAY button (49)
h MUTING button (50)
j RETURN button
a*1
gc
b*1
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)
RECEIVER
h*1
■ Installing the batteries
i*1
k HOME button (51)
l SLEEP button (49)
d
Tip
ac
• You can also use the remote controller to control Onkyo
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and other
components.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more details
(➔ page 76).
j
k
d
Batteries (AA/R6)
Note
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing
the batteries.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of
batteries.
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,
remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or
corrosion.
• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent
damage from leakage or corrosion.
■ Controlling the tuner
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press TUNER (or
RECEIVER).
You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER
repeatedly.
e
e
a q/wbuttons (38)
b D.TUN button (38)
c DISPLAY button
d CH +/– button (39)
e Number buttons (38)
bf
l
*1
These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE
MODE other than Receiver mode is selected.
En-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
To find the best position for your subwoofer, while
Speaker Configuration
playing a movie or some music with good bass,
experiment by placing your subwoofer at various
positions within the room, and choose the one that
provides the most satisfying results.
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.
The same signal is output from each jack.
The following table indicates the channels you should
use depending on the number of speakers that you
have.
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and
solid bass.
To get the best from your surround sound system,
you need to set the speaker settings automatically
(➔ page 24) or manually (➔ page 59).
Connections
Tip
• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an
external amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an
input on the amplifier.
Number of speakers
Front speakers
2 3 4 5 6 7 7
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Connecting the AV
Receiver
Center speaker
✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels
Surround speakers
Surround back speaker*1
Surround back speakers*1
Front high speakers*1
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
The speaker terminals are color-coded for
identification purpose.
✔
✔
✔
Connecting Your Speakers
Speaker
Color
White
Red
Front left, Front high left, Zone 2 left
Speaker Configuration
Front right, Front high right, Zone 2
right
a b
cI J
f
5.1-channel:
7.1-channel:
7.1-channel:
a bcdef
a bcdef
a bcdef
Center
Green
Blue
+
+
G H
I J
Surround left
Surround right
Surround back left
Surround back right
Gray
Brown
Tan
*1
Front high and surround back speakers cannot be used
at the same time.
Using Powered Subwoofers
The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-
coded and you should attach them to the positive (+)
side of each speaker cable in accordance with the
table above. Then all you need to do is to match the
color of each label to the corresponding speaker
terminal.
d e G H
Front speakers
Center speaker
a b
c
Corner
position
Surround speakers
Subwoofer(s)
Surround back speakers
Front high speakers
de
f
1/3 of wall
position
G H
I J
En-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of
Connecting the Speaker Cables/Powered Subwoofers
your speakers and AV components. A setup wizard
is launched upon first-time use to let you perform
the settings.
Please connect a, b, c, d, eand ffor 5.1-channel surround.
If you’re using only one surround back
b
a
Front
speaker L
Front
speaker, connect it to the SURROUND
speaker R
BACK or FRONT HIGH L terminals.
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.
• By default, speakers for 7.1-channel surround are
configured to use: front right/front left/center/
surround right/surround left/surround back right/
surround back left/subwoofer.
c
Center speaker
■ Screw-type speaker terminals
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires
tightly, as shown.
Red
Green
White
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)
■ Banana Plugs (North American models)
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker
terminal before inserting the banana plug.
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the
center hole of the speaker terminal.
Gray
Tan
Brown
Blue
Powered
subwoofer
f
Powered
subwoofer
f
Surround
speaker R
e
Surround back or
Front high speaker R
H J
Surround back or
Front high speaker L
G I
Surround
speaker L
d
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)
terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–) terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the
sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.
En-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Speaker Connection Precautions
Bi-amping the Front Speakers
Important:
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to
remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter
(high) and woofer (low) terminals.
Using Dipole Speakers
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of
the connected speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less
than 6 ohms, be sure to set the minimum speaker
impedance to “4ohms” (➔ page 59). If you use
speakers with a lower impedance, and use the
amplifier at high volume levels for a long period of
time, the built-in protection circuit may be activated.
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative
wires. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have
contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so
may damage the AV receiver.
TV/screen
• Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.
Bi-amping provides improved bass and treble
performance.
a
a
When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to
drive up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.
Perform bi-amping connections by using FRONT
terminals and SURROUND BACK or FRONT HIGH
terminals as shown below.
Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections
and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the
speaker setting to enable bi-amping (➔ page 59).
b
b
You can use dipole speakers for the surround and
surround back speakers. Dipole speakers output the
same sound in two directions.
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on
them to indicate how they should be positioned. The
surround dipole speakers (a) should be positioned so
that their arrows point toward the TV/screen, while
the surround back dipole speakers (b) should be
positioned so that their arrows point toward each
other, as shown.
• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.
Tweeter (high)
Woofer (low)
Front right
Front left
En-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Use this jack to connect to the set top box/digital
video recorder, etc.
D
E
G
Connecting the TV/AV components
Use this jack to connect to the game consoles,
etc.
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your speakers and AV components. To display the setup
menu on the TV screen, connecting the TV to HDMI OUT MAIN is required.
Use this port to connect to a LAN port on a router
so the AV receiver can be connected to your
home network.
F
J
G
H
I
E
D
C
B
A
Use jack and terminal here to connect the
supplied FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
H
I
Use this jack to make connections using an
analog audio cable.
With this connection, you can also enjoy analog
audio from external components while you are in
Zone 2/3.
Use this jack to make connections using a
component video cable.
J
K
Use this jack to connect to the camcorder/MHL-
enabled mobile device, etc.
Tip
If you select the input selector button, the signal from
the component connected to the assigned jack is
played.
Connections
• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI
through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”
(➔ page 70) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.
• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is
output despite following the above-mentioned procedure,
set your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to
PCM.
• Connect a turntable (MM) that has a built-in phono preamp
to TV/CD IN, or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono
preamp turned off. If your turntable (MM) doesn’t have a
phono preamp, connect it to PHONO IN. If your turntable
has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a
commercially available MC head amp or MC transformer to
connect to PHONO IN. See your turntable’s manual for
details.
Use this jack to connect to the HDMI input of the
TV. If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return
A
*1
Channel (ARC) , you need to connect an optical
digital cable together with the HDMI cable to jack
F.
Another TV can be connected to the HDMI OUT
SUB jack.
Input selector
buttons
B C D E
K
*1
ARC is the function that carries the audio signal
• Before making any AV connections, read the
manuals supplied with your AV components.
• Push plugs in all the way to make good connections
(loose connections can cause noise or
malfunctions).
from the TV to jack A. With ARC, a single HDMI
cable can connect the TV and the AV receiver.
Use this jack to connect to your Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player, etc.
B
C
If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV
receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting
the ground wire may produce an audible hum. If this
happens, disconnect it.
Use this jack to connect to the Satellite/cable set-
top box, etc.
• To prevent interference, keep audio and video
cables away from power cords and speaker cables.
En-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link)
p
Internet radio
Modem
With its support for MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link),
the AUX (Front) input allows you to deliver high-
definition video from a connected mobile device.
The AV receiver allows interoperability of the CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control) specified in the HDMI
standard, which is known as RIHD. Various linked
operations can be performed by connecting the AV
receiver to an RIHD-compatible TV, player, or
recorder.
Router
WAN
LAN
K
Default setting is set to off, so it is required to change
the setting to on.
MHL-enabled
mobile device, etc.
Perform this setting after the initial setup.
Computer or media server
Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB
port on your computer. Music on your computer
cannot be played through the AV receiver in this way.
Connecting to the Network (Optional)
About RIHD-compatible components
The following diagram shows how you can connect
the AV receiver to your home network. In this
example, it’s connected to a LAN port on a router,
which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.
Network connection by wireless LAN is possible. See
“Performing Wireless LAN Setup” for connections
(➔ page 27).
The following components are p-compatible
(As of January 2013).
■ TV
• Sharp TV
■ Players/Recorders
• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players
• Toshiba players and recorders
• Sharp players and recorders (only when used
together with Sharp TV)
The default of the assignment for the input selector buttons and jacks are as shown below. These settings can
be changed. (The assignment for the composite video jacks, analog audio jacks, and HDMI Front jack cannot be
changed.)
*
Models other than those mentioned above may have some
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.
Input selector buttons HDMI jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN COAXIAL Composite video and
Note
jacks
and OPTICAL jacks
analog audio jacks
• For proper linked operations, do not connect more
p-compatible components than the quantities
specified below, to the HDMI input terminal.
–Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.
–Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up
to three.
–Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.
• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV
amplifier via HDMI.
• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more
p-compatible components than the above-
mentioned quantities are connected.
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
GAME
HDMI IN 1
HDMI IN 2
HDMI IN 3
HDMI IN 4
DIGITAL IN
COAXIAL 1
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
BD/DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN
IN COAXIAL 2
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
CBL/SAT
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
STB/DVR
VIDEO/AUDIO IN
GAME
PC
HDMI IN 5
AUDIO IN PC
AUX
HDMI Front
TV/CD
PHONO
DIGITAL IN OPTICAL AUDIO IN TV/CD
AUDIO IN PHONO
En-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI
jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the
AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.
• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction
when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV
receiver is connected to an pcompatible TV or
player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It
may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to
Operations that can be performed with
RIHD connection
Confirm the settings
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.
2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the
power of the connected components is turned off
automatically with the link operation.
3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder.
■ For p-compatible TV
The following linked operations are enabled by
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible
TV.
• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the
TV is set to standby.
• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work
depending on the component model connected. In such
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder, and verify the following:
• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and
selects the input to which the Blu-ray Disc/DVD
player/recorder is connected.
• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the
input to which the AV receiver is connected.
5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,
select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu
screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is
output from the speakers of the TV, and not from
the speakers connected to the AV receiver.
6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV
receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver, and not from the TV
speakers.
• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either
output the audio from the speakers connected to the
AV receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.
• It is possible to output the audio coming from the
tuner or auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of
the AV receiver. (A connection such as an optical
digital cable or similar is required in addition to the
HDMI cable.)
• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the
remote controller of the TV.
• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for
the AV receiver can be performed from the remote
controller of the TV.
Connection Tips
The video and audio signal flow
Connect the AV receiver between the AV
components and the TV. The signal from the AV
components is carried through the AV receiver. You
can enjoy the audio of the TV through the AV
receiver.
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
■ For p-compatible players/recorders
The following linked operations are enabled by
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible
player/recorder.
Video, audio
AV receiver
Note
• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the
DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending
on the player models.)
• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV
receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on
the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re-
do the corresponding operations on the TV.
• In case of an pconnection with uand uaudio
control compatible components, do not connect the u
cable at the same time.
Audio
Video, audio
• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the
player/recorder that is playing back.
TV, projector, etc.
• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using
the remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.
Video components can be connected by using any
one of the following video connection formats:
composite video, component video, or HDMI, the
latter offering the best picture quality.
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as
shown, with composite video and component video
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI output(s).
*
Depending on the model used, not all operations may be
available.
Note
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector at this
time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics
Control) operation will not be guaranteed.
En-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
*2
This is possible when “Audio Return Channel” is set to
“Auto” (➔ page 71), the TV/CD input selector is
selected, and your TV is ARC capable.
Signal Selection Example
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Video Signal Flow Chart
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Tip
Composite
Component
HDMI
Composite
Component
HDMI
• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding
input selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the
case of an optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL
indicator lights. In the case of an analog connection, neither
IN
IN
AV receiver
AV receiver
MONITOR OUT
Component
MONITOR OUT
Component
Composite
HDMI
Composite
HDMI
AV Cables and Jacks
TV, projector, etc.
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends
that video signals pass through the system without
upconversion (e.g., component video input passing
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture
Mode” setting to “Bypass” (➔ page 66).
■ HDMI
The composite video and component video outputs
pass through their respective input signals as they are.
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.
Note
• In order for the AV receiver to upconvert component input
to HDMI output, the source output must be set to 480i/576i.
When signal is input at resolution of 480p/576p and more,
error message will be displayed.
■ Component video
Audio components can be connected by using any of
the following audio connection formats: analog,
optical, coaxial, or HDMI.
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind
that the AV receiver does not convert digital input
signals for analog line outputs and vice versa.
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and
color difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best
picture quality (some TV manufacturers label their
component video sockets slightly differently).
■ Signal Selection
If signals are present at more than one input, the
inputs will be selected automatically in the following
order of priority: HDMI, component video, composite
video.
However, for component video only, regardless of
whether a component video signal is actually present,
if a component video input is assigned to the input
selector, that component video input will be selected.
And if no component video input is assigned to the
input selector, this will be interpreted as no
component video signal being present.
In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video
signals are present at both the HDMI and composite
video inputs. However, the HDMI signal is
automatically selected as the source and the video is
output by the HDMI outputs.
Green
Blue
Y
C
B/PB
If signals are present at more than one input, the
inputs will be selected automatically in the following
order of priority: HDMI, digital, analog.
C
R/PR
Red
Audio Signal Flow Chart
■ Composite video
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs,
and other video equipment.
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.
Analog
Optical
Coaxial
*1
HDMI
IN
Yellow
*1
*1
AV receiver
■ Optical digital audio
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The
audio quality is the same as coaxial.
OUT
HDMI
*1
*2
*1
TV, projector, etc.
*1
Depends on the “Audio TV Out (Main)” or “Audio TV
Out (Sub)” setting (➔ pages 70, 71).
En-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
■ Coaxial digital audio
Connecting the Antennas
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital
*1
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.
audio quality is the same as optical.
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the
antenna to use the tuner.
Orange
■ Analog audio (RCA)
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.
Taiwanese models)
(European,Australian
and Asian models)
White
Red
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Insert the plug fully
into the jack.
Push.
Insert wire.
Release.
*1
For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4
and 192 kHz are also supported.
Assembling the AM loop antenna
Caution
Note
• Be careful not to injure
yourself when using
thumbtacks.
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close
when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.
Thumbtacks, etc.
Caution
• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug
straight when inserting and removing.
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Indoor FM antenna (supplied)
Note
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best
possible reception.
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.
Tip
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna
instead.
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available
outdoor AM antenna.
En-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Connecting Onkyo RI Components
Using Headphones
Make sure that each Onkyo component is
Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a
standard plug (1/4 inch or ø 6.3 mm) to the
PHONES jack.
1
1
connected with an analog audio cable
(connection I in the hookup examples)
(➔ page 15).
While the headphones plug is inserted in the
PHONES jack, =indicator lights.
Make the uconnection (see the illustration).
2
3
Note
If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape
deck, change the Input Display (➔ page 50).
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your
headphones.
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES
jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Zone 2/3
speakers are not turned off.)
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian
and Asian models).
With u(Remote Interactive), you can use the
R
L
following special functions:
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
e.g., cassette tape deck
■ System On/Auto Power On
When you start playback on a component connected
via u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV
receiver will automatically turn on and select that
component as the input source.
R
L
ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
RI Dock
■ Direct Change
When playback is started on a component connected
via u, the AV receiver automatically selects that
component as the input source.
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor instead of the component. You
must enter the appropriate remote control code first
(➔ page 77).
Note
• Use only ucables for uconnections. ucables are
supplied with Onkyo components.
■ Remote Control
• Some components have two ujacks. You can connect
either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for
connecting additional u-capable components.
• Connect only Onkyo components to ujacks. Connecting
other manufacturer’s components may cause a
malfunction.
• Some components may not support all ufunctions. Refer
to the manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change ufunctions do not work.
En-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver
into a different branch circuit.
Turning Off
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with
the AV receiver. The supplied power cord is designed
exclusively for use with the AV receiver and should not be
used with any other equipment.
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver
while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing
so may cause an electric shock. Always disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet first, and then the AV
receiver.
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
1
or
Turning On & Basic
Operations
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on
the remote controller.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To
prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the
AV receiver, always turn down the volume before
you turn it off.
Turning On
Tip
Turning On/Off the AV
Receiver
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
1
• The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on
• For details on power management settings, see “Auto
Standby” (➔ page 71).
• If the HDMI Through setting is not set in standby mode, an
MHL-enabled mobile device cannot be charged even if it is
connected.
or
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on
the remote controller.
Connecting the Power Cord
(European and Taiwanese models)
1
■ Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps
(Initial Setup)
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV
receiver’s AC INLET.
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps
to help you configure the AV receiver before you use
it for the very first time. These settings only need to
be made once. See “Initial Setup” for details
(➔ page 22).
To AC wall outlet
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
2
Note
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your
speakers and AV components.
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power
surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment on
En-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Use q/won the AV receiver or remote
Firmware Update Notification
Initial Setup
1
controller to select one of the following
options, and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
When a new version of the firmware is available, the
notification window “Firmware Update Available”
pops up. This notification only appears when the AV
receiver is connected to the Internet (➔ pages 16,
27). To perform the firmware update, follow the
instructions on screen.
This section explains the settings that we recommend
you to make before using the AV receiver for the very
first time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time
use to let you perform those settings.
Continues to “Audyssey MultEQ: Auto
Setup”.
`No:
Tip
Skips the settings and terminates the initial
setup. The setup wizard goes to
“Terminating the Initial Setup” (➔ page 23).
You can always restart the initial setup by
selecting “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware
Setup” menu (➔ page 73).
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
Use q/wand ENTER on the AV receiver or remote
controller to select one of the options.
`Update Now:
Selecting the Language for the On-
screen Setup Menus
Starts the firmware update.
Refer to “Firmware Update” (➔ page 90).
`Remind me Later:
This step determines the language used for the on-
screen setup menus. See “Language” in “OSD
The update notification will pop up again the
next time you turn the AV receiver on.
`Never Remind me:
Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup
Tip
Disables the automatic update notification.
This step performs the automatic speaker setup.
• Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the
initial setup, select “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware Setup”
menu (➔ page 73).
Tip
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled
in “Update Notice” (➔ page 73).
1
and then press ENTER.
`Do it Now:
After selecting the language for on-screen setup
menus, a welcome screen is displayed.
The automatic speaker setup is performed
following instructions on screen. Refer to
step 2 of “Using the Automatic Speaker
Setup” (➔ page 24). When this setting is
complete, the setup wizard continues to
“Source Connection”.
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator
Initial Setup
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces
light in either of the following conditions:
–“HDMI Through” is enabled (the HDMI indicator is
off).
Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all the speakers and devices?
Before starting, please connect speakers and sources.
Now, would you like to start initial setup?
1st Step : Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup
2nd Step : Source Connection
3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup
4th Step : Network Connection
`Do it Later:
Yes
No
Skips this setting.
Press ENTER and continue to “Source
Connection”.
HOME Exit
–“Network Standby” is enabled (the NET indicator
is off).
Note
• If Zones are turned on or, if a mobile device connected to
the Front Input (MHL) is charging, the HYBRID STANDBY
indicator won’t light.
En-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Follow the instructions on screen to perform
the network checking.
The checking is complete when the message
“Successfully connected.” appears at the
middle of the screen. Press ENTER to terminate
the initial setup.
Source Connection
Remote Mode Setup
2
3
This step checks the connection of source
components.
With this step, you can enter remote control codes for
the components you want to operate.
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
1
1
`Yes, Continue:
and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Performs the remote control code input.
Refer to step 5 of “Looking up for Remote
Control Codes” (➔ page 76).
`No, Skip:
Tip
• If you have selected “Wireless”, you need to perform
the wireless LAN setup. See “Performing Wireless
LAN Setup” (➔ page 27). This completes the initial
setup.
Performs the checkings.
`No, Skip:
Skips this step and continues to “Remote
Mode Setup”.
If an error message appears, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
`Retry:
Performs the checking again.
`No, Do it Later:
Skips this step and continues to “Network
Connection”.
Select the input selector for which you want to
2
check the connection and press ENTER.
The picture and sound of the corresponding
verification prompt.
When you’re finished, select one of the
following options and press ENTER.
2
`Yes, Done:
Skips this step and terminates the initial
setup. The setup wizard goes to
“Terminating the Initial Setup”.
The setup wizard continues to “Network
Connection”.
`No, not yet:
When prompted, use q/wto select one of the
3
following options and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
You can enter other remote control codes.
Confirms that the source is properly
displayed.
`No:
Terminating the Initial Setup
Displays an error report. Follow the
troubleshooting instructions and recheck the
source.
This step ends the initial setup process.
Network Connection
This step checks your network connection.
Press ENTER.
To restart the initial setup, select “Initial Setup”
1
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
4
Use q/wto select one of the following options,
1
in the “Hardware Setup” menu (➔ page 73).
and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
and then press ENTER.
`Yes:
Returns to step 2.
Performs the checkings.
`No, Done Checking:
The setup wizard continues to “Remote
Mode Setup”.
`No, Skip:
Skips this step and terminates the initial
setup.
En-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Measurement procedure
Note
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light
dimmers, or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if
it is not in use) or place it away from all audio electronics.
• The microphone picks up test tones played through each
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup runs.
To create a listening environment in your home
theater that all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey MultEQ
takes measurements at up to six positions within the
listening area. Position the microphone at ear height
of a seated listener with the microphone tip pointed
directly at the ceiling using a tripod. Do not hold the
microphone in your hand during measurements as
this will produce inaccurate results.
With the supplied calibrated microphone,
Audyssey MultEQ automatically determines the
number of speakers connected, their size for
purposes of bass management, optimum crossover
frequencies to the subwoofer (if present), and
distances from the primary listening position.
®
Audyssey MultEQ then removes the distortion caused
by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical
problems over the listening area in both the frequency
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced
sound for everyone. Audyssey MultEQ can be used
• Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is
connected.
■ First measurement position
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this
refers to the most central position where one would
normally sit within the listening environment.
Audyssey MultEQ uses the measurements from this
position to calculate speaker distance, level, and the
optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.
®
with Audyssey Dynamic EQ and
®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume (➔ page 64).
Before using this function, connect and position all of
your speakers.
Audyssey MultEQ offers two ways of measuring: the
“Audyssey Quick Start” and “Audyssey MultEQ
Full Calibration”.
• “Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement
from one position to perform the speaker setting
only.
■ Second-sixth measurement positions
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the
places where the other listeners will sit). You can
measure up to six positions.
• “Audyssey MultEQ Full Calibration” uses the
measurement from six positions to correct room
response in addition to the speaker setting.
The more positions are used in measuring, the better
the listening environment will become. We
to create the best listening environment.
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration
takes about 15 minutes.
TV
d e f
c a b
: Listening area
a to f: Listening position
Total measurement time varies depending on the
number of speakers.
En-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.
On the TV, select the input to which the AV
receiver is connected.
Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB,
and then press ENTER.
Test tones are played through the subwoofer.
Use the volume control on the subwoofer.
Use q/wto select an option, and then press
1
2
4
9
ENTER.
MultEQ: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main
Listening Position a, and connect it to the
SETUP MIC jack.
-- Review Speaker Configuration --
Subwoofer
Front
Center
Yes
100Hz
40Hz
Note
• If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,
disregard the displayed level and press ENTER to
proceed to the next step.
Surround
100Hz
None
120Hz
2ch
Front High
Surround Back
Surround Back Ch
SETUP MIC jack
• If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its
maximum and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB,
leave the subwoofer’s volume control at its maximum
and press ENTER to proceed to the next step.
Save
Cancel
The options are:
`Save:
Use q/wto select “Audyssey Quick Start” or
“Audyssey MultEQ Full Calibration”, and then
press ENTER.
5
6
Save the calculated settings and exit
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup.
Speaker setup microphone
Press ENTER.
`Cancel:
The speaker setting menu appears.
®
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Note
and Speaker Setup.
Speaker Setup starts.
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is
connected to other video outputs, use the AV
receiver’s display when changing settings.
Test tones are played through each speaker as
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup runs. This process takes a few minutes.
Please refrain from talking during
measurements and do not stand between
speakers and the microphone.
Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone
during Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
setup.
Tip
• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker
configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels
by using e/r.
When you’ve finished making the settings,
press ENTER.
3
Use q/wto select a target, and use e/rto
change the setting.
10
MultEQ: Auto Setup
AUDYSSEY
After the results of Audyssey MultEQ have been
saved, the menu will display the “Audyssey”
(➔ page 64), “Dynamic EQ” (➔ page 64),
“Dynamic Volume” (➔ page 64) settings.
Speakers Type (Front)
Powered Zone 2
Surround Back/Front High
Subwoofer
Normal
No
Surround Back
Yes
If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go
to step 9.
Perform the “2. Speaker Setup” according to your
speaker configuration:
Note
–Speakers Type (Front) (➔ page 59)
–Powered Zone 2 (➔ page 59)
–Surround Back/Front High (➔ page 60)
–Subwoofer (➔ page 60)
Place the speaker setup microphone at the
Audyssey MultEQ performs more
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.
• These settings are applied to all input selectors.
7
8
measurements. This takes a few minutes.
Press ENTER.
If you use a powered subwoofer(s), go to step 4.
If not, go to step 5.
11
12
When prompted, repeat step 7.
Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.
En-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Error Messages
Note
The setup of the speaker can be done manually
(➔ page 59).
The setup of the volume level of each speaker also
can be done manually (➔ pages 60, 61).
• You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and
Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by
disconnecting the setup microphone.
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup.
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically
when Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup starts.
• Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ Room
Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup
again, as room EQ characteristics may have changed.
While Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup is in progress, one of the error
messages below may appear.
MultEQ: Auto Setup
Note
AUDYSSEY
Ambient noise is too high.
• Please note that THX recommends any THX main
speakers using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any THX
speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover (➔ page 59).
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers
and the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting
the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually.
notice irregular results when setting the level and/or
distance of the main speakers. If this happens, THX
recommends setting them manually.
Retry
Cancel
Error message
The options are:
`Retry:
Try again.
`Cancel:
Using a Powered Subwoofer
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup.
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs
very low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it
may not be detected by Audyssey MultEQ Room
Correction and Speaker Setup.
• Ambient noise is too high.
The background noise is too loud. Remove the
source of the noise and try again.
• Speaker Matching Error!
The number of speakers detected was different
from that of the first measurement. Check the
speaker connection.
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the
subwoofer’s volume to the half-way point, set it to its
highest crossover frequency, and then try running
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup again. Note that if the volume is set too high
and the sound distorts, detection issues may occur,
so use an appropriate volume level. If the subwoofer
has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or Direct.
Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for
details.
• Writing Error!
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving
again. If this message appears after 2 or 3
attempts, contact your Onkyo dealer.
• Speaker Detect Error
This message appears if a speaker is not detected.
“No” means that no speaker was detected.
Tip
• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings
(➔ page 12).
En-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
■ PIN code method
Use q/wto select “Network Connection”, and
e/rto select “Wireless”, and then press
ENTER (➔ page 72).
Performing Wireless LAN Setup
5
6
1. Use q/wto select “PIN Code” and then press
ENTER.
A wireless LAN (WLAN) is a local area network that
relies on wireless communication.
To achieve a wireless network connection, you will
need the following component:
An 8-digit PIN code is displayed. The PIN
code is displayed scrolling on the AV
receiver’s display.
The “Wireless Setup” menu is displayed on
screen.
Tip
2. Input the provided code in your Access Point.
For information on the registration process,
please refer to the instruction manual
provided with your Access Point device.
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is
selected in “Network Connection” in initial setup
(➔ page 23).
■ Access point
Also known as the base station, it links your AV
receiver (wireless client) with a PC or network.
Access points fall into two categories: the bridge
type that only performs data relay in a local area
network, or the router type that has a built-in router
functionality.
Press q/wto select (North American models)
Press ENTER to confirm.
“Push Button Configuration (Other
7
Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi
indicator flashes. After the connection to your
Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights
and the connection status is displayed on the
screen.
This completes the wireless LAN setup.
You can review your setup with the “Status”
option on the “Wireless Setup” menu.
*1
Routers)” /(excluding North American
models) “Push Button Configuration (Select
from Router)”, and press ENTER.
The method to make settings by “Push Button
Configuration” is displayed, providing the
following two options:
To achieve a wireless network connection, it is
setup can be done either automatically or manually.
You use your AV receiver as a wireless client
(wireless terminal) and connect it to a PC or to the
Internet.
Tip
*1
(North American models) To connect to Linksys
Note
E/EA Router, select “Push Button Configuration
(Linksys E/EA Router)” and make settings
following the instructions on the screen.
• If Wi-Fi indicator doesn’t light, the connection to your
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this
setting again (➔ page 85).
Automatic wireless LAN setup
■ Push Button method
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1
1. Use q/wto select “Push Button” and then
press ENTER.
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then
2
2. Press the WPS button on your Access Point
device.
press ENTER.
Use q/wto select “Hardware Setup”, and then
3
Tip
press ENTER.
• How long the WPS button should be pressed differs
depending on the type of Access Point device. Refer
to the instruction manual provided with your Access
Point device for operations.
Use q/wto select “Network”, and then press
4
ENTER.
En-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning On & Basic Operations
Select “OK” and press ENTER.
Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi
indicator flashes. After the connection to your
Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights
and the connection status is displayed on the
screen.
Manual wireless LAN setup
Use q/wto select the Access Point you wish to
connect to, and then press ENTER.
Depending on your encryption settings, the
security of your Access Point will provide one of
the following patterns:
7
8
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then
2
press ENTER.
■ WEP method
This completes the wireless LAN setup.
You can review your setup with the “Status”
option on the “Wireless Setup” menu.
Use q/wto select “Hardware Setup”, and then
1. Use q/wto select “Default Key ID” and then
3
press ENTER.
press ENTER.
2. Use q/wto choose an ID between 1 and 4,
and then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select “Network”, and then press
4
Note
ENTER.
• If Wi-Fi indicator doesn’t light, the connection to your
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this
setting again (➔ page 85).
3. Use q/wto select “Password” and then press
ENTER.
Use q/wto select “Network Connection”, and
5
e/rto select “Wireless”, and then press
4. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the
password and confirm with “OK”.
ENTER (➔ page 72).
The “Wireless Setup” menu is displayed on
screen.
■ WPA/WPA2 method
1. Use q/wto select “Password” and then press
Tip
ENTER.
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is
selected in “Network Connection” in initial setup
(➔ page 23).
2. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the
password and confirm with “OK”.
Use q/wto select “Search Wireless Network”
6
■ No encryption
and then press ENTER.
A list of available Access Points is displayed.
If your Access Point device is not secured by
encryption, there is no need to input any secret
key.
Tip
• If Access Point you wish to connect to is not displayed
in the list of available Access Points, the setting also
can be made by entering “SSID”, “Security”, and
“Password” manually after selecting “Direct Input”.
Tip
• When you select the Access Point you wish to connect to
from the list of available Access Points, “SSID” and
“Security” are automatically displayed. These settings can
be changed manually.
En-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
• “Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder”
(➔ page 36)
Select the input on the AV receiver to play the
AV components.
2
• “Remote Playback” (➔ page 37)
• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (➔ page 38)
• “Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources”
(➔ page 40)
• “Controlling Other Components” (➔ page 76)
• “Using the Onkyo Dock” (➔ page 80)
Press the input selector button to which the AV
components to be played is connected.
Press the TV/CD button to play the audio of the
TV. Switching the input on the TV is also
required. Select the input to which the AV
receiver is connected by using the TV remote
controller.
Playback
* For the CEC compatible TV and the AV components
connected with HDMI connections, switching the input
is automatically performed. Switch the input manually
for other AV components.
1
2
Select the desired listening mode.
You can enjoy various types of listening mode.
The listening mode is switched by pressing
Listening mode button on the AV receiver or the
remote controller.
4
4
This section describes the basic operation such as
connection/setup/operation.
Adjust the volume.
You can enjoy the surround sound.
■ Screen Saver
3
If there is no video signal on the current input source
and no operation for a specific time (three minutes by
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.
Tip
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the
HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV
power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this
may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound
may be cut off.
1 2
3
4
Tip
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can
be changed in the “Screen Saver” setting
(➔ page 69).
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV
receiver is operated.
ꢀ
See also:
(Actual location of buttons depends on the country.)
• “Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device”
(➔ page 31)
1
• “Playing a USB Device” (➔ page 32)
• “Listening to TuneIn” (➔ page 32)
• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (➔ page 34)
• “Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)”
(➔ page 34)
components.
En-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
TOP MENU
This button displays the top menu for each media or
service.
REPEAT
a
b
o
Controlling Contents of USB or
Network Devices
Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat
modes.
(➔ page 31)
q/wand ENTER
Tip
These buttons navigate through the menus.
• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of
other components (➔ page 76).
image file format of JPEG, PNG, and BMP is possible. The
image file format cannot be displayed in either of the
following cases:
–Total number of horizontal and vertical pixels is more than
2048 x 2048.
–Image data size (JPEG/PNG) is more than 4 MB.
Press USB or NET first.
e/r
This button cycles through pages.
c
d
1
h
This button starts playback.
7
This button selects the beginning of the current song.
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.
e
f
g
5
Note
This button fast-reverses the current song.
• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the
devices and media used for playback.
3
This button pauses playback.
• When you select the NET input selector on the AV receiver
for the first time, “DISCLAIMER” screen is displayed on TV.
Please read the contents thoroughly before using network
service. Select “Agree” if you agree with the content. If you
disagree, network service is not available on the AV
receiver (➔ page 89).
SEARCH
a
b
i
You can toggle between the playback screen and the
list screen during playback.
DISPLAY
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
This button switches between song information during
playback.
Press this button while the list screen is displayed to
return to the playback screen.
c
d
e
f
g
MENU
This button displays the menu of Internet radio
services.
RETURN
This button returns to the previous menu.
j
k
4
This button fast-forwards the current song.
l
m
n
6
This button selects the next song.
2
This button stops playback.
RANDOM
This button performs random playback.
En-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Pairing the AV receiver with a Bluetooth-
enabled device
Understanding Icons on the Display
Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-
enabled Device
This section describes icons that appear on the AV
receiver’s display during media playback.
Pairing is an operation where Bluetooth-enabled
devices register with each other beforehand. Use the
procedure below to pair the AV receiver with your
Bluetooth-enabled device. Once a pairing operation is
performed, it does not need to be performed again.
About the Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Icon
Description
Bluetooth wireless technology is a short-range
wireless technology that enables wireless data
communication between digital devices. Bluetooth
wireless technology operates within a range of about
15 meters (49 feet). You do not need to use a cable
for connection, nor is it necessary for the devices to
face one another, such is the case with infrared
technology.
Folder
Track
Place the Bluetooth-enabled device within
1 meter (3.3 feet) from the AV receiver.
1
Playback
Select “BLUETOOTH” in “Input” in Quick
2
Pause
Setup, and press ENTER (➔ page 52).
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes and the AV
receiver is put to pairing mode.
“Now Pairing” appears on the AV receiver’s
display.
Tip
Fast Forward
Fast Reverse
Artist
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
• If your Bluetooth-enabled device supports A2DP protocol,
its audio file will play through the AV receiver.
• Connection is not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled
devices.
Tip
• The same operation can be done by pressing
BLUETOOTH button on the AV receiver.
• When connecting a Bluetooth-enabled device paired
with the AV receiver to the AV receiver, BLUETOOTH
input selector is automatically selected.
• If you connect the AV receiver to another Bluetooth-
enabled device, hold down BLUETOOTH button until
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes or make settings in
“Status” of “Bluetooth” for pairing (➔ page 73).
• Some Bluetooth-enabled device may need to re-
establish pairing for each connection.
Album
Operating on the Remote Controller
Repeat One Track
Repeat Folder (USB Device)
Repeat
The Bluetooth-enabled device can be operated by the
supplied remote controller.
Tip
• To operate your Bluetooth-enabled device by the remote
controller, the Bluetooth-enabled device must support
profile: AVRCP.
• Operation by the remote controller is not guaranteed for all
Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Shuffle
Note
• “BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected, if you’ve selected
NET or USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
En-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
• When disconnecting on your Bluetooth-enabled device,
BLUETOOTH indicator on the AV receiver will go off.
• If there is no sound output even after the pairing is done
successfully, consult the instruction manual of the
Bluetooth-enabled device, and then select the model name
of the AV receiver as the audio output device.
• While connected to a Bluetooth-enabled device, the AV
receiver cannot be detected and a connection cannot be
established from another Bluetooth-enabled device.
• If you cannot connect with a paired Bluetooth-enabled
device, perform the pairing operation between the AV
receiver and the Bluetooth-enabled device again.
During this period (about 2 minutes), you can
operate the Bluetooth-enabled device to pair
with the AV receiver.
Note
3
4
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, do not disconnect the USB cable
supplied with the USB device from the USB port.
Note
• When establishing a connection with the AV receiver,
select the profile (A2DP, AVRCP) at the Bluetooth-
enabled device. If the Bluetooth-enabled device does
not support the AVRCP profile, you cannot perform
playback or other operations with the AV receiver.
Listening to TuneIn
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 16, 27).
Tip
Tip
• For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
Note
• Due to the characteristic of Bluetooth wireless technology,
the sound played on the AV receiver may slightly delay from
the sound played on the Bluetooth-enabled device.
Once the AV receiver is detected and the
model name of the AV receiver appears on the
display of your Bluetooth-enabled device,
select the model name.
When a Bluetooth connection is established
successfully, BLUETOOTH indicator will light.
TuneIn is a new radio service which offers the music,
sports and news all over the world.
Over 70,000 radio stations and 2 million on-demand
programs are registered, and you can easily enjoy
them by selecting stations or programs of your
choice. TuneIn is preprogrammed on the AV receiver.
Playing a USB Device
Tip
Tip
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
Press NET.
• The model name appeared on the display of your
Bluetooth-enabled device is “Onkyo TX-NR727”.
1
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
This section explains how to play music files from a
USB device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).
See also:
*
If passkey is required on the display of the
5
6
Bluetooth-enabled device, enter “0000”.
The AV receiver only supports numerical
passkey up to 4 digits.
* Passkey may be called “Passcode”, “PIN code”, “PIN
number” or “Password”.
• “Network/USB Features” (➔ page 94).
Press USB to select the “USB” input.
1
2
Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s
USB port.
Tip
Play back the desired music on the Bluetooth-
enabled device.
The audio is output from the AV receiver.
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV
receiver cannot read the USB device.
Use q/w/e/rto select “TuneIn” and then
2
Press ENTER.
press ENTER.
Tip
3
A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a
folder, use q/wto select it, and then press
ENTER.
• The AV receiver may not work as normal depending on the
circumstance even though the AV receiver is placed within
the 15 meters range. In such cases, get the Bluetooth-
enabled device closer to the AV receiver and retry the
operation.
Use q/wto select a music file, and press
4
ENTER or 1to start playback.
En-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Category/Area, etc. Store your favorite stations or
Setting an TuneIn account
Use q/wto select a station or a program, and
then press ENTER.
3
programs in this folder.
To create a user account for TuneIn, open a browser
window such as Internet Explorer , and connect to
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press
MENU button on the remote controller.
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Presets”, and
press ENTER.
Playback starts.
®
tunein.com website. With a TuneIn account, you can
quickly search and browse for stations and programs
at tunein.com website and save as your favorites
which will automatically appear in your AV receiver
My Presets account. If you have a TuneIn account,
select “Login” and then “I have a TuneIn account”
on the top list. Enter your user name and password to
login.
tunein
Tip
My Music
0 : 11
Great Artist
My Favorite
“My Presets” folder will not be displayed.
Go to Menu
Tip
Either of the following menus can be selected by
pressing the MENU button on the remote controller or
pressing ENTER button to select “Go to Menu”.
`Add to My Presets
• Select “Login with a registration code”, and associate a
device from my page on TuneIn website by using a
registration code displayed on the screen. This allows you
to login without entering a user name and a password.
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored
in “My Presets”.
`Remove from My Presets
My Favorites/My Presets
In this menu, stations or programs stored in “My
Presets” can be deleted.
`Report a problem
This menu is used to report problems on TuneIn
service or resolve the problems in a wizard style.
`View Schedule
In this menu, program listings of stations or
programs can be displayed.
`Clear recents
There are two ways you can register specific Internet
radio stations (programs) from the TuneIn.
• Adding to My Favorites
The selected program will be added to “My
Favorites” on the network service screen, which
appears when pressing NET.
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press
MENU button on the remote controller.
In this menu, all the stations and programs
stored in “Recents” can be deleted.
`Add to My Favorites
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Favorites”, and
press ENTER.
3. Use q/w/e/rto select “OK”, and press ENTER.
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored
in “My Favorites”.
Tip
• You can rename the stations saved in “My Favorites”
(➔ page 34).
• Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to My
Presets
Select "TuneIn", and press ENTER button to display
a folder of “My Presets” on the screen that displays
En-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.
The Internet radio station is then added to “My
Favorites”. To play the registered station, press
NET, and then select “My Favorites” on the
network service screen. A list of registered
Internet radio stations appears. Select the one
that you saved and press ENTER.
Registering Other Internet Radio
Changing the Icon Layout on the
Network Service Screen
5
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 16, 27).
Tip
Tip
• You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
The layout of icons can be customized by switching
their positions on the network service screen.
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,
depending on the type of data or audio format used
by the Internet radio station, you may not be able to
listen to some stations.
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must
register your station in “My Favorites” of the network
service screen, as described below.
Tip
• If you want to add a new station directly from “My
Favorites”, select an empty slot in the list and press MENU.
Then, select “Create New Station” and press ENTER.
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen.
Use that keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL
respectively, and then press ENTER.
Press NET.
The network service screen appears.
1
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”,
press MENU with the station selected or while the station is
playing. Then, use q/wto select “Delete from My
Favorites” and press ENTER. You can also delete stations
from the Web Setup.
Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.
2
Note
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See
the separate instructions for more information.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
Use q/w/e/rto select an icon to move, and
3
then press ENTER.
• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station
and press MENU. Then, use q/wto select “Rename this
station” and press ENTER.
Use q/w/e/rto select another icon as the
4
destination, and then press ENTER.
The icons switch positions and the message
“Completed!” appears.
• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.
Select “Network” on the Setup menu to verify
your IP address (➔ page 72).
1
Take a note of the IP address.
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)
On your computer, start your web browser.
2
3
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 16, 27).
Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the
browser’s Internet address (URL) field.
Tip
®
If you are using Internet Explorer , you can also
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
enter the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File”
menu.
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on
your Internet browser (Web Setup).
This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or media server through the AV receiver
(Server Playback).
Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the
Internet radio station’s name and URL.
4
En-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Windows Media Player Setup
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media
streaming”.
A dialog box appears.
Use q/w/e/rto select “DLNA”, and press
2
3
3
4
ENTER.
■ Windows Media Player 11 Setup
Use q/wto select a server, and then press
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your computer.
Tip
ENTER.
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
network. You can skip step 3.
The menu is displayed according to the server
functions.
Start Windows Media Player 11.
Note
1
2
• The search function does not work with media servers
which do not support this function.
• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot
be accessed from the AV receiver.
• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server,
the AV receiver may not able to access the content.
See the instruction manual of the media server.
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
streaming”.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location.
On the “Library” menu, select “Media
Sharing”.
The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.
Select the “Share my media” check box, and
then click “OK”.
3
On the “Media streaming options”, select the
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to
“Allowed”.
4
5
A list of the supported devices appears.
Use q/wto select an item, and then press
5
Select the AV receiver in the list, and then
click “Allow”.
4
ENTER or 1to start playback.
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 12 library.
The corresponding icon will be checked.
dlna
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 11
configuration.
5
My favorite song 1
0 :11 / 3:00
Artist name
My favorite album
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV
receiver.
Playing music files on a server (DLNA)
Start your computer or media server.
1
2
Tip
Note
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free
from the Microsoft web site.
Press NET.
• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3may not
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
work.
• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no
information can be retrieved from the server. In this
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver
connections.
■ Windows Media Player 12 Setup
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your personal computer.
Start Windows Media Player 12.
1
Tip
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
En-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Playing music files on a shared folder
■ Creating a shared folder
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder
In order to enjoy Home Media, you must first create a
shared folder on your computer.
Right-click the folder that you want to share.
This section explains how to play music files on a
computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage)
through the AV receiver.
1
2
3
Select “Properties”.
Press NET.
1
The network service screen appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired
LAN connection is selected, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.
On the “Sharing” tab, select “Advanced
Sharing”.
Windows 8/Windows 7 Setup
Check the check box of “Share this folder”
and then click “OK”.
■ Setting the sharing options
4
Select “Choose homegroup and sharing
options” on the Control Panel.
Under “Network File and Folder Sharing”,
select “Share”.
1
5
Tip
Select “Everyone” from the pull-down menu,
click “Add”, and then click “Share”.
Tip
6
• If this option is not available, verify that “View by:” is set
to “Category”.
• The same operation can be done by selecting
“Network Service” in the Home menu.
Tip
Select “Change advanced sharing settings”.
2
3
• With this setting, everyone is allowed to access the
folder. If you want to assign a user name and
password to the folder, make the corresponding
settings for “Permissions” in “Advanced Sharing” of the
“Sharing” tab.
Use q/w/e/rto select “Home Media”, and
2
press ENTER.
Under “Home or Work”, verify that the
following items are checked:
Use q/wto select a server, and then press
3
“Turn on network discovery”, “Turn on file and
printer sharing”, “Turn on sharing so anyone with
network access can read and write files in the
Public folders”, and “Turn off password protected
sharing”.
ENTER.
Tip
• Verify that “Workgroup” is properly set.
Note
• The server name of your computer can be viewed on
the computer properties screen.
• When using NAS (Network Attached Storage), refer to
the instruction manual provided with your NAS unit.
Use q/wto select the desired shared folder
4
Select “Save changes” and click “OK” on the
confirmation screen.
4
and then press ENTER.
When asked for a user name and password,
enter the necessary login information.
Tip
5
• The login information will be remembered for the next
time you log in.
• The login information is that of the user account set
when creating a shared folder.
Use q/wto select a music file and then press
6
ENTER or 1.
The playback of the selected file starts.
En-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.
This completes the Windows Media Player 12
configuration.
You can now play the music files in your
Windows Media Player 12 library.
Adjusting the Volume.
Remote Playback
5
5
You can adjust the volume by adjusting the
volume bar in the “Remote playback” window.
The default maximum volume level is 82 (0dB). If
you wish to change this, enter the value from the
Web Setup in your browser. Refer to step 3 of
“Registering Other Internet Radio” for details
(➔ page 34).
The volume value of the remote window and the
volume value of the AV receiver may not always
match.
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 16, 27).
Tip
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI outputs.
Tip
• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote
control of my Player...” is checked.
Remote playback is supported by Windows Media
Player 12.
Remote Playback means you can play the music files
stored on a media server or personal computer with
the AV receiver by operating the controller device in
the home network.
Using Remote Playback
Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV
receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote
playback” window.
Turn on the AV receiver.
1
2
Start Windows Media Player 12.
To enable remote playback, you must first
configure Windows Media Player 12.
Windows Media Player 12 Setup
Note
This section explains how to configure Windows
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the
music files stored on your personal computer.
• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following
cases:
–Network services are being used.
On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a
music file.
3
–Contents are being played from a USB device.
–“Agree” is not selected on the “DISCLAIMER” screen
displayed on the TV when you select the NET input
selector on the AV receiver for the first time.
The right-click menu appears.
Start Windows Media Player 12.
1
2
Tip
• For selecting another media server, select the desired
media server from the “Other Libraries” menu on
Windows Media Player 12.
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media
streaming”.
A dialog box appears.
Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.
4
Tip
The “Play to” window appears and playback on
the AV receiver starts. Operations during remote
playback can be made from the “Play to” window
of Windows 8/Windows 7 on your personal
computer.
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will
display a list of the playback devices connected to the
network. You can skip step 3.
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media
streaming”.
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary
slightly depending on the network location.
3
A playback screen will be displayed on the
connected TV.
Tip
• If the operating system of your personal computer is
Windows 8, click “Play to” and select the AV receiver.
On the “Media streaming options”, select the
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to
“Allowed”.
4
En-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
■ Tuning into stations by frequency
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by
entering the appropriate frequency.
Press TUNING q/w.
Listening to AM/FM Radio
2
Searching stops when a station is found.
This section describes the procedure of using the
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the
FM STEREO indicator lights as shown.
On the remote controller, press TUNER
repeatedly to select “AM” or “FM”, followed by
D.TUN.
1
Using the Tuner
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio
stations. You can store your favorite stations as
presets for quick selection.
TUNED
AUTO
You can also change the frequency steps
(➔ page 69).
(Actual display depends on the country.)
FM STEREO
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to
Press TUNER to select either “AM” or “FM”.
2
1
enter the frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5
or 8, 7, 5, 0.
If you have entered the wrong number, you can
retry after 8 seconds.
In this example, FM has been selected.
Each time you press TUNER, the radio band
changes between AM and FM.
Tip
• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may
be impossible to get good reception. In this case,
switch to manual tuning mode and listen to the station
in mono.
Band
Frequency
Presetting AM/FM Stations
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your
favorite AM/FM radio stations as presets.
■ Manual tuning mode
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.
(Actual display depends on the country.)
Tuning into Radio Stations
■ Auto tuning mode
Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to
store as a preset.
1
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator goes off on the AV receiver’s
display.
1
See the previous section.
Press MEMORY.
The preset number flashes.
2
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
Press and hold TUNING q/w.
1
2
indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display.
The frequency stops changing when you release
the button.
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the
frequency one step at a time.
(Actual display depends on the country.)
While the preset number is flashing (about 8
3
seconds), use PRESET e/rto select a preset
from 1 through 40.
En-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
■ What is RDS?
■ Displaying Radio Text (RT)
Press MEMORY again to store the station or
channel.
The station or channel is stored and the preset
number stops flashing.
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite
AM/FM radio stations.
4
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method
of transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was
developed by the European Broadcasting Union
(EBU) and is available in most European countries.
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to
displaying text information, RDS can also help you
find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock,
etc.).
Press RT/PTY/TP once.
The RT information scrolls across the AV
receiver’s display.
1
Note
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV
receiver waits for the RT information.
• If the message “No Text Data” appears, no RT
information is available.
■ Selecting Presets
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS
information:
PS (Program Service)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS
information, the station’s name will be displayed.
Pressing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3
seconds.
To select a preset, use PRESET e/ron the AV
1
receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.
Tip
■ Finding Stations by Type (PTY)
You can search for radio stations by type.
• You can also use the remote controller’s number
buttons to select a preset directly.
Press RT/PTY/TP twice.
The current program type appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
1
RT (Radio Text)
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting
text information, the text will be shown on the AV
receiver’s display.
PTY (Program Type)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by
type.
TP (Traffic Program)
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that
broadcast traffic information (➔ page 40).
■ Deleting Presets
Use PRESET e/rto select the type of
2
Select the preset that you want to delete.
See the previous section.
program you want.
See the table shown later in this chapter.
1
While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING
MODE.
To start the search, press ENTER.
2
3
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of
the type you specified, at which point it stops
briefly before continuing with the search.
The preset is deleted and its number disappears
from the AV receiver’s display.
When a station you want to listen to is found,
press ENTER.
If no stations are found, the message “Not
Found” appears.
4
Using RDS (excluding North American and
Taiwanese models)
Note
• RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are
available.
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator
lights.
When the station is broadcasting text information, the
text can be displayed.
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be
displayed when unsupported characters are received. This
is not a malfunction.
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be
displayed intermittently or not at all.
En-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
■ Listening to Traffic News (TP)
RDS program types (PTY)
Playing Audio and Video from Separate
Sources
Type
Display
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic
news.
None
None
You can listen to the audio of one input source while
watching the video of another. This function takes
advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input
source (PHONO, TV/CD, PC, TUNER) is selected,
the video input source remains unchanged. The
following procedure shows how to listen to a CD
player’s audio source connected to TV/CD IN while
watching a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s video source
connected to BD/DVD.
News reports
Current affairs
Information
Sport
News
Press RT/PTY/TP three times.
Affairs
1
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP
(Traffic Program), “[TP]” will appear on the AV
receiver’s display. If “TP” without square brackets
appears, this means that the station is not
broadcasting TP.
Info
Sport
Education
Educate
Drama
Culture
Science
Varied
Pop M
Rock M
Easy M
Light M
Classics
Other M
Weather
Finance
Children
Social
Drama
Culture
To locate a station that is broadcasting TP,
press ENTER.
Science and technology
Varied
2
Tip
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station
that’s broadcasting TP.
If no stations are found, the message “Not
Found” appears.
Pop music
Rock music
Middle of the road music
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
Weather
assign all video inputs to “- - - - -” (➔ page 58).
Press BD/DVD.
1
2
Press TV/CD.
The audio output changes to the CD source, but
the video of previously-selected BD/DVD is
retained.
Finance
Children’s programmes
Social affairs
Religion
Start playback on your Blu-ray Disc/DVD and
CD players.
3
Religion
Phone In
Travel
You can now enjoy watching your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD with the sound of your CD player.
Phone in
Travel
Leisure
Leisure
Jazz
Jazz music
Country music
National music
Oldies music
Folk music
Documentary
Alarm test
Country
Nation M
Oldies
Folk M
Document
TEST
Alarm
Alarm!
En-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
PURE AUDIO button and indicator
(European, Australian and Asian models)
(North American and Taiwanese models)
Using the Listening Modes
About Listening Modes
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display
and analog video circuitry are turned off. Only video
signals input through HDMI input can be output from
the HDMI output. The indicator lights when this mode
is selected. Pressing this button again will select the
previous listening mode.
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall,
with high fidelity and stunning surround sound.
Selecting Listening Modes
■ Listening Mode Buttons
Press RECEIVER first.
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME,THX
Note
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to the
AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial, optical,
or HDMI).
(European, Australian and Asian models)
of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying
Source Information” (➔ page 49).
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select
the following listening modes: Pure Audio (European,
Australian and Asian models), Mono, Direct, and Stereo.
PURE AUDIO
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME,THX
MOVIE/TV button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with movies and TV.
MUSIC button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with music.
GAME button
This button selects the listening modes intended for
use with video games.
MUSIC
MOVIE/TV
GAME
THX
THX button
This button selects the THX listening modes.
En-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Input Source
■ Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes
The following audio formats are supported by the listening modes.
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Speaker
Source Layout
This is mono (monophonic) sound.
A
Orchestra
Suitable for classical or operatic music,
this mode emphasizes the surround
channels in order to widen the stereo
image, and simulates the natural
reverberation of a large hall.
A CN
This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two independent audio signal channels
are reproduced through two speakers.
S
S
O r c h e s t r a
D
This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround system has five main
channels of sound and a sixth subwoofer channel (called the point-one
channel).
D
F
G
Unplugged
and jazz, this mode emphasizes the
front stereo image, giving the impression
of being right in front of the stage.
H
This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a further sound enhancement to
5.1-channel sound with two additional speakers that provide greater sound
envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds.
F
U n p l u g g e d
This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround system can produce a discrete
or a matrix-encoded sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded material.
G
Studio-Mix
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening
to music in this mode creates a lively
sound field with a powerful acoustic
image, like being at a club or rock
concert.
S t u d i o – M i x
This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This provides a center back surround
channel from 5.1-channel sources.
H
Speaker Layout
TV Logic
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV
shows produced in a TV studio,
surround effects to the entire sound, and
clarity to voices.
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel. See
“Speaker Configuration” for the speaker setup (➔ page 59).
T V L o g i c
Z
X
C
Game-RPG
G a me – R PG
Game-Action
In this mode, the sound has a dramatic
feel with a similar atmosphere to
Orchestra mode.
In this mode, sound localization is
distinct with emphasis on bass.
G a me – A c t i o n
Game-Rock
In this mode, sound pressure is
emphasized to heighten live feel.
G a me – R o c k
B
V
Game-Sports
Suitable for audio source with much
reverberation.
G a me – S p o r t s
All Ch Stereo
Ideal for background music, this mode
fills the entire listening area with stereo
sound from the front, surround, and
surround back speakers.
XCN
A l
l
C h S t e r e o
Full Mono
In this mode, all speakers output the
same sound in mono, so the sound you
hear is the same regardless of where
you are within the listening room.
F u l
l
M o n o
En-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
DSD*4
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
T-D (Theater-
Dimensional)
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual
surround sound even with only two or
three speakers. This works by
controlling how sounds reach the
listener’s left and right ears. Good
results may not be possible if there’s too
much reverb, so we recommend that
you use this mode in an environment
with little or no natural reverb.
In this mode, audio from the input source
is output without surround-sound
processing. The speaker configuration
(presence of speakers), crossover
frequency, speaker distance, A/V Sync
and much of the processing set via the
audio setup are enabled. See “On-
screen Setup” for more details
A ZXC
S N
D
D XCN
D S D
T – D
Dolby Digital
F
D o l b y
D
G
H
Dolby Digital Plus*5
D XCN
F XCN
*3
D o l b y
D
+
(➔ page 52).
Dolby TrueHD
■ Listening Modes
D o l b y T r u e HD
DTS
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
D XCN
D T S
Pure Audio*1*2
In this mode, the display and video
circuitry are turned off, minimizing
possible noise sources for the ultimate in
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the
analog video circuitry is turned off, only
video signals input through HDMI IN can
be output from the HDMI output.)
A ZXC
DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio
D XCN
F XCN
*3
S N
P u r e A A u d i o
*3
D
F
G
H
D T S – HD HR
DTS-HD Master
Audio
D T S – HD MS T R
Direct
In this mode, audio from the input source
is output without surround-sound
DTS Express
D XCN
D XCN
D i r e c t
processing. The speaker configuration
(presence of speakers) and speaker
distance settings are enabled, but much
of the processing set via the audio setup
is disabled. See “On-screen Setup” for
more details (➔ page 52).
D T S E x p r e s s
DTS 96/24*6
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24
sources. This is high-resolution DTS
with a 96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit
resolution, providing superior fidelity.
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS
96/24 logo.
D T S 9 6 / 2 4
Stereo
Sound is output from the front left and
right speakers and subwoofer.
N
S t e r e o
DTS-ES Discrete*7
This mode is for use with DTS-ES
Discrete soundtracks, which use a
discrete surround back channel for true
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven
totally separate audio channels provide
better spatial imaging and 360-degree
sound localization, perfect for sounds
that pan across the surround channels.
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES
logo, especially those with a DTS-ES
Discrete soundtrack.
G V
Mono
Use this mode when watching an old
movie with a mono soundtrack, or use it
with the foreign language soundtracks
recorded in the left and right channels of
some movies. It can also be used with
DVDs or other sources containing
multiplexed audio, such as karaoke
DVDs.
E S D i s c r e t e
M o n o
Multichannel
multichannel sources.
D XCN
F
M u l
t
i c h
En-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
DTS-ES Matrix*7
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix
soundtracks, which use a matrix-
encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that
bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those
with a DTS-ES Matrix soundtrack.
Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed
to more effectively use existing program
material when height channel speaker
outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic
IIz Height can be used to upmix a
variety of sources from movies and
upmix game content.
G V
S B
D
E S M a t r i x
F
P L
z
H e i g h t
G
H
Dolby Pro Logic IIx*8 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-
channel source for 7.1-channel
Dolby Pro Logic II
playback. It provides a very natural and
seamless surround-sound experience
that fully envelops the listener. As well
as music and movies, video games can
also benefit from the dramatic spatial
effects and vivid imaging.
Dolby EX
These modes expand 5.1-channel
sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.
They’re especially suited to Dolby EX
soundtracks that include a matrix-
encoded surround back channel. The
additional channel adds an extra
dimension and provides an enveloping
surround sound experience, perfect for
rotating and fly-by sound effects.
D V
P L
P L
P L
P L
P L
P L
M o v i e
M u s i c
G a m e
H
D o l b y E X
D o l b y
D
E X
If you’re not using any surround back
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be
used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV,
DVD, VHS).
S XCN
D V
x
x
x
M o v i e
M u s i c
G a m e
DTS Neo:6
This mode expands any 2-channel
source for up to 7.1-channel playback. It
uses seven full-bandwidth channels of
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded
material, providing a very natural and
seamless surround sound experience
that fully envelops the listener.
• Dolby PLIIx Music
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby
Surround (Pro Logic) music source
(e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS,
DVD).
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Use this mode with any stereo movie
(e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).
S XCN
D V
N e o : 6 C i n e m a
N e o : 6 M u s i c
• Dolby PLIIx Game
• DTS Neo:6 Music
Use this mode with video games,
especially those that bear the Dolby
Pro Logic II logo.
Use this mode with any stereo music
source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV,
VHS, DVD).
• Dolby PLIIx Movie
• Dolby PLIIx Music
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx modes to expand 5.1-channel
sources for 7.1-channel playback.
• DTS Neo:6
N e o : 6
This mode uses DTS Neo:6 to expand
5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-
channel playback.
En-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
THX
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Audyssey DSX*9
• Audyssey DSX
Founded by George Lucas, THX
develops stringent standards that
ensure movies are reproduced in movie
theaters and home theaters just as the
director intended. THX Modes carefully
optimize the tonal and spatial
characteristics of the soundtrack for
reproduction in the home-theater
environment. They can be used with 2-
channel matrixed and multichannel
sources. Surround back speaker output
depends on the source material and the
selected listening mode.
D B
Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system
that adds new speakers to improve
surround impression. Starting with a
5.1 system Audyssey DSX first adds
Wide channels for the biggest impact
on envelopment. Research in human
hearing has proven that information
from the Wide channels is much more
critical in the presentation of a realistic
soundstage than the Back Surround
channels found in traditional 7.1
systems. Audyssey DSX then creates
a pair of Height channels to reproduce
the next most important acoustical and
perceptual cues. In addition to these
new Wide and Height channels,
Audyssey DSX applies Surround
Envelopment Processing to enhance
the blend between the front and
surround channels.
F
A u d y s s e y D S X
G
H
• THX Cinema
D CN
F
T H X C i n e m a
T HXMu s i c
T H X G a m e s
soundtracks for playback in a home
theater environment. In this mode, THX
Loudness Plus is configured for cinema
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching,
and Adaptive Decorrelation are active.
• THX Music
THX Music mode is tailored for listening
to music, which is typically mastered at
significantly higher levels than movies.
In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is
configured for music playback and only
Timbre Matching is active.
G
H
• Dolby Pro Logic II Movie +
Audyssey DSX
• Dolby Pro Logic II Music +
Audyssey DSX
• Dolby Pro Logic II Game +
Audyssey DSX
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II
and Audyssey DSX modes can be
used.
S B
P L
P L
P L
M o v i e D S X
M u s i c D S X
G a m e D S X
• THX Games
THX Games mode is meant for
spatially accurate playback of game
audio, which is often mixed similarly to
movies but in a smaller environment.
THX Loudness Plus is configured for
game audio levels, with Timbre
Matching active.
The PLII and Audyssey DSX
indicators light on the AV receiver’s
display.
En-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Movie + THX
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Music + THX
Music
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Game + THX
Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic
II/IIx*8 and THX Cinema/Music/Games
modes can be used.
• THX Select2 Cinema
S CN
D V
T HXS2 C i n e m a
T H X S 2 M u s i c
T H X S 2 G a m e s
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1
movie using 8 speakers giving you the
best possible movie watching
experience. In this mode, THX ASA
processing blends the side surround
speakers and back surround speakers
providing the optimal mix of ambient
and directional surround sounds.
• THX Select2 Music
For the replay of multichannel music,
the THX Select2 Music should be
selected. In this mode, THX ASA
channels of all 5.1 encoded music
sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital,
DVD-Audio, etc. to provide a wide and
stable rear soundstage.
The PLII/PLIIx and THX indicators light
on the AV receiver’s display.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie + THX
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music + THX
Music
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx
and THX Cinema/Music modes can be
used.
The PLIIx and THX indicators light on
the AV receiver’s display.
D V
H
• THX Select2 Games
For the replay of stereo and
multichannel game audio, the THX
Select2 Games mode should be
selected. In this mode, THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround
channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded
game sources such as analog, PCM,
DTS, and Dolby Digital. This accurately
places all game audio surround
information creating a full 360 degree
playback environment. THX Select2
Games is unique as it gives you a
smooth transition of audio in all points
of the surround field.
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Cinema
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Music
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX
Games
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz
Height and THX Cinema/Music/Games
modes can be used.
S B
D
F
G
H
The PLIIz and THX indicators light on
the AV receiver’s display.
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema + THX Cinema
S CN
• Dolby Pro Logic II Game + THX
Select2 Games
S V
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Cinema
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Music
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Games
The combination of DTS Neo:6 and
THX Cinema/Music/Games modes can
be used. The Neo:6 and THX
indicators light on the AV receiver’s
display.
D V
H
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II
Game and THX Select2 Games modes
can be used. The PLII and THX
indicators light on the AV receiver’s
display.
En-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Listening Mode
Description
Input
Source Layout
Speaker
• THX Surround EX
D V
T H X S u r r E X
This mode expands 5.1-channel
sources for 6.1/7.1- channel playback.
It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital EX
sources. THX Surround EX, also
known as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is
a joint development between Dolby
Laboratories and THX Ltd.
H
Note
*1
(North American and Taiwanese models) This listening mode is not available.
Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2/3 is active.
*2
Besides, if you activate Zone 2/3 while Pure Audio is selected, the listening mode will
automatically switch to Direct.
Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source, the corresponding speakers
will output the sound.
The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player,
setting the output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.
For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.
DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.
If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.
This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:
–Center speaker is connected.
–Front high speakers is connected.
En-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
be sure to go to the THX Audio Setup screen and
choose the setting that closely corresponds to the
back speaker spacing (➔ page 61). This will re-
optimize the surround sound field.
ASA is used in four modes: THX Select2 Cinema,
THX Select2 Music, THX Select2 Games and Dolby
Pro Logic II + THX Select2 Games.
Dialogue Normalization
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the
THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically
added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX
Surround EX).
Dialogue Normalization (DialogNorm) is a feature of
Dolby Digital, which is used to keep the programs at
the same average listening level so the user does not
have to change the volume control between Dolby
Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD
Timbre Matching
The human ear changes our perception of a sound
depending on the direction from which the sound is
coming. In a movie theater, there is an array of
surround speakers so that the surround information is
all around you. In a home theater, you may only have
two speakers located to the side of your head. In this
case, the Timbre Matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that
they more closely match the tonal characteristics of
the sound coming from the front speakers. This
ensures seamless panning between the front and
surround speakers.
programs. When playing back software which has
been encoded in Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and
Dolby TrueHD, sometimes you may see a brief
message in the front panel display which will read
“DialogNorm: X dB” (X being a numeric value). The
display is showing how the program level relates with
THX calibration level. If you want to play the program
at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust
the volume. For example, if you see the following
message: “DialogNorm: + 4 dB” in the front panel
display, to keep the overall output level at THX
calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control
by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the
playback loudness is preset, you can choose your
preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.
The listening mode may not be selected depending
on the input signal. The signal input from the
external AV components can be displayed by the
function on the next page.
Adaptive Decorrelation
In a movie theater, a large number of surround
speakers help create an enveloping surround sound
experience. If a home theater only has two sidewall
surround speakers, the surround speakers may
sound similar to headphones lacking spaciousness
and envelopment. Surround sounds will also collapse
toward the closet speaker as you move away from the
middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation
slightly changes one surround channel’s time and
phase relationship with respect to the other surround
experience as in a movie theater using only two
speakers.
THX Cinema Processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and
technologies established by the world-renowned film
production company Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from
George Lucas’ personal desire to make your
experience of the film soundtrack in both movie
theaters and in your home theater as faithful as
possible to what the director intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special environments
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played
back in movie theaters with similar equipment and
conditions. Most of those soundtracks are remixed
using flat response loudspeakers similar to those
used in the small home theater environment before
being transferred onto Blu-ray Discs, DVD, etc.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theater
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which
processes the audio on the two side and two back
surround speakers for the optional surround sound
experience. When you set up your home theater
system using eight speaker outputs (Left, Center,
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,
Surround Back Left, Surround Left, and Subwoofer),
En-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Displaying Source Information
Using the Sleep Timer
Setting the Display Brightness
You can display various information about the current
input source as follows.
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to
turn off automatically after a specified period.
You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s
display, and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator
off and on in conjunction.
Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY
repeatedly to cycle through the available
information.
Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP
1
1
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes
in 10 minute steps.
Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER
repeatedly to cycle through the following
patterns:
1
Tip
• Normal brightness + indicator off.
• Dim brightness + indicator off.
• Dimmer brightness + indicator off.
• Normal brightness + indicator on (default).
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display when the sleep timer has been set. The
specified sleep time appears for about 5
seconds, then the previous display reappears.
• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV
receiver.
The following information can be typically displayed.
Tip
Tip
Input source &
volume*1
• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.
• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver
sleeps, press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on
SLEEP as the time being displayed is 10 minutes or
less, the sleep timer will go off.
• (North American and Taiwanese models)
Alternatively, you can use DIMMER on the AV
receiver.
Listening mode
Signal format*2
Sampling
frequency*2
Input signal
resolution
Output resolution
*1
When AM or FM radio is used, the band, preset number,
and frequency are displayed.
If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.
*2
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then
the previously displayed information reappears.
En-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
Changing the Input Display
Using the Whole House Mode
The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to
add extra background music to your home party; this
The Whole House Mode selects the same input
source for Multi Zone as the main room’s.
See also:
When you connect an u-capable Onkyo
component, you must configure the input display so
that ucan work properly.
This setting can be done only from the front panel.
Press TV/CD or GAME.
1
“TV/CD” or “GAME” appears on the AV receiver’s
• “2. Speaker Setup” (➔ page 59)
display.
2
3 seconds) to change the input display.
display.
While holding down ZONE 2, press ZONE 3 on
1
To cancel the Whole House Mode, change the
input source for the main room or select a
listening mode (➔ page 41).
■ TV/CD:
TV/CD → DOCK
→
TAPE
Note
■ GAME:
• The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio
and audio from NET or USB input selector.
• To adjust the volume of Multi Zone, switch the AV
receiver to Multi Zone control. See “Adjusting the
Volume for Zone 2” (➔ page 75) for the volume
adjustment of Multi Zone.
“
Note
• “DOCK” can be selected for the “TV/CD” or “GAME”
input selector, but not at the same time.
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using
the remote controller for the first time (➔ page 77).
• The Whole House Mode is not available in either of the
–The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set
to “On” (➔ page 71) and you’re listening through
your TV speakers.
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 69) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
–a pair of headphones is connected.
Muting the AV Receiver
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV
receiver.
Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator
1
flashes on the AV receiver’s display.
Tip
• To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.
• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV
receiver is set to standby.
En-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback
a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.
components connected through HDMI, you can
easily switch between inputs as their previews are
displayed on a single screen.
Using the Home Menu
Please wait until it becomes operable.
Press ENTER to display the network service
screen. If you want to use the Internet radio
services, use q/w/e/rto select the desired
service. Pressing ENTER again switches to that
selection. If you want to play music files on a
computer or media server, use q/w/e/rto
select “DLNA” and then press ENTER. If you
want to play music files on a computer or NAS
(Network Attached Storage), use q/w/e/rto
select “Home Media” and then press ENTER.
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently
used menus.
Press ENTER to display the main preview
(currently selected HDMI input) and the
q/wor e/rto select a preview thumbnail and
pressing ENTER will switch the AV receiver to
that input source.
Tip
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV
screen.
1
Tip
• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be
filled in black.
• You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as
well as their positioning on screen (➔ page 71).
Tip
■ USB
• Alternatively, you can use HOME on the AV receiver.
portable players and USB storage devices
connected to the AV receiver’s USB port
(➔ page 32). Note that this selection will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
Note
–HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or
–No signal is present on the current input source.
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of
InstaPrevue.
Press ENTER to select a drive or browse the
contents of the media connected, followed by
q/wto select the desired folder or track.
Pressing ENTER as a track is selected will start
playback.
Use e/ror q/wand ENTER to make the
■ Firmware Update
2
desired selection.
Press HOME to close the menu.
`With this selection, you can update the firmware
of the AV receiver. Note that this selection will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
■ Setup
`With this selection, you can access the common
settings of the on-screen Setup menu.
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu
(➔ page 56).
Press ENTER to start the procedure
(➔ page 90).
■ Network Service
Tip
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home
network (➔ pages 16, 27).
• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick
Setup (➔ page 52).
`With this selection, you can use various Internet
radio services or play the contents stored in media
■ InstaPrevue
`With this selection, you can preview audio/video
streams coming from HDMI inputs (HDMI
IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT). Even with multiple
En-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
In addition, previews of the video streams coming
Using the Quick Setup
from HDMI inputs (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT)
*2
are displayed.
Use q/wto select an input source and view the
related information. Pressing ENTER switches to
the selected input source.
Advanced Operations
On-screen Setup
RECEIVER
■ Audio (➔ page 53)
“Treble”, “Phase Matching Bass”, “Subwoofer
Level”, “Center Level”, “Audyssey”,
ENTER,
*3
*3
“Dynamic EQ ”, “Dynamic Volume ”, “Late
Night”, “Music Optimizer”, “Re-EQ” and “Re-
EQ(THX)”.
q/w/e/r
Q SETUP
RETURN
*4
This section describes the procedure for using the
remote controller unless otherwise specified.
`You can change the following settings: “Wide
*5
Mode” and “Picture Mode ”.
Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.
screen.
1
2
With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the
Quick Setup or the Setup Menu (HOME).
See also:
• “Picture Adjust” (➔ page 66)
*6
■ Information
■ Quick Setup
`You can view the information of the following
items: “Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently
used settings. You can change settings and view the
current information.
B D / DV D
I n p u t
A u d i o
V i d e o
I n f o r m a t i o n
L i s t e n i n g M o d e
*7
■ Listening Mode
`You can select the listening modes that are
grouped in the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”,
“MUSIC”, “GAME”, and “THX”.
■ Setup menu (HOME)
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way
to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings
are organized into 9 categories.
Use q/wto select the category and e/rto
select the listening mode. Press ENTER to
switch to the selected listening mode.
Use q/wand ENTER to make the desired
selection.
Tip
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
Note
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.
*1
“BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected, if you’ve selected
NET or USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
• The video preview is not displayed when:
– HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or
– No signal is present on the current input source.
• The video of the currently-selected input is displayed on
the main screen, not on a preview thumbnail.
*1
■ Input
*2
`You can select input sources and view the
following information: the name of input selectors,
input assignments, the name of the device paired
with the AV receiver via Bluetooth, radio
information, and ARC function setting.
En-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*3
*4
*5
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be
selected when any of the THX listening modes is
selected, with “Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve
THX Settings” set to “Yes” (➔ page 62).
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, “Video”
cannot be selected (➔ page 57).
Phase Matching Bass
Using the Audio Settings of Quick
Setup
■ Phase Matching Bass
`Off
`On
You can change various audio settings from the
Quick Setup (➔ page 52).
• This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and
BLUETOOTH input selectors.
From the warm low notes produced by a cello to the
deep frequencies of electronic music, a good audio
system should be able to deliver plenty of bass
resonance.
While traditional enhancement systems effectively
boost low-frequency sound, they are often prone to
the effects of phase shifting, which can overwhelm
mid-range frequencies and muddy the sound. Our
Phase-Matching Bass Boost technology effectively
preserves mid-range clarity-allowing vocals and
strings to shine-while maintaining a smooth, powerful
bass response at all volume levels.
Note
• These settings are not available in either of the following
cases:
–The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
“On” (➔ page 71) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture
Mode” (➔ page 66), pressing ENTER allows you to
adjust the following items via the Quick Setup:
“Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press
RETURN to return to the “Picture Mode” setting.
Depending on the input source and listening mode, not
all channels shown here output the sound.
cases:
(➔ page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
speakers.
*6
*7
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 69) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
Tone Control
■ Bass
Note
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds
output from the front speakers.
– “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 69) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
• The Phase Matching Bass is disabled when the Direct,
Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian models), or
THX listening mode is selected.
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting is fixed
to “Off”.
Explanatory Notes
■ Treble
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds
output from the front speakers.
■ Phase Matching Bass
a
b
`Off
Operating on the AV receiver
`On
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front
speakers, except when the Direct, Pure Audio
(European, Australian and Asian models) or THX
listening mode is selected.
Press TONE repeatedly to select “PM Bass”.
1
2
aSetting target
bSetting options (default setting underlined)
Use – and + to change the setting.
Operating on the AV receiver
Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass”
or “Treble”.
1
Use – and + to adjust.
2
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 52)
En-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
• “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected
when any of the THX listening modes is selected, with
“Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings”
set to “Yes” (➔ page 62).
• With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot
be used when “TrueHD Loudness Management” is set to
“Off”.
Speaker Levels
■ Subwoofer Level
`–15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
Music Optimizer
■ Center Level
Late Night
■ Music Optimizer
`Off
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while
listening to an input source.
■ Late Night
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources,
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the
AV receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you
made here, go to “Level Calibration” (➔ page 61)
before setting the AV receiver to standby.
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound
quality of compressed music files. When set to “On”,
the M.Opt indicator lights on the AV receiver’s
display.
the options are:
`Off
`Low:
Small reduction in dynamic range.
`High:
Note
Tip
• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is
muted.
• (North American and Taiwanese models) Alternatively,
you can use MUSIC OPTIMIZER on the AV receiver.
Large reduction in dynamic range.
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones
is connected.
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” (➔ page 59) cannot be adjusted.
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:
`Auto:
Note
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital
audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and
analog audio input signals.
The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”
automatically.
When NET or USB input selector is selected, this function
even works with digital audio input signals with a sampling
rate below 48 kHz (except DSD signals and Dolby TrueHD
signals) regardless of the PCM digital audio input signals
with a sampling rate below 48 kHz.
• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure
Audio (European, Australian and Asian models)
listening mode is selected.
`Off
`On
®
Audyssey
Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of
Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear quiet
to disturb anyone.
■ Audyssey
See “Audyssey” in “4. Source Setup” (➔ page 64).
■ Dynamic EQ
See “Dynamic EQ” in “4. Source Setup” (➔ page 64).
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.
Note
■ Dynamic Volume
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the
or no effect when you select the different options.
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input
source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby
TrueHD.
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver
is set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set
See “Dynamic Volume” in “4. Source Setup”
(➔ page 64).
Note
• These technologies can be used when all the following
conditions are met:
–Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note
that “Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey MultEQ Full
Calibration” method.
–Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio
(European, Australian and Asian models) is selected.
–A pair of headphones is not connected.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 52)
En-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Re-EQ (Re-Equalization)
Movie soundtracks were designed for playback in
large movie theaters using professional equipment. If
the movies were not remixed for the home theater,
the tonal balance of the soundtracks can be
excessively bright and harsh when played back over
home audio equipment. In those instances, Re-
Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for
listening to a movie soundtrack in a smaller home
environment.
■ Re-EQ
`Off
`On
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS
Express, DSD, Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height,
Dolby PLIIx Movie, DTS Neo:6 Cinema and 5.1-
channel source + Neo:6.
■ Re-EQ(THX)
`Off
`On
This function can be used with the following listening
modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and
THX Select2 Cinema.
Note
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones
is connected.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 52)
En-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Main menu item
Sub menu item
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)
Setup Menu Items
6. Miscellaneous
(➔ page 69)
Volume Setup
OSD Setup
Tuner
Main menu item
Sub menu item
Monitor Out
Remote
indicator
7. Hardware Setup
(➔ page 69)
1. Input/Output Assign
(➔ page 57)
HDMI
HDMI Input
Auto Standby
Network
Component Video Input
Digital Audio Input
Speaker Settings
Speaker Configuration
Speaker Distance
Level Calibration
Equalizer Settings
THX Audio Setup
Multiplex/Mono
Dolby
RECEIVER
Initial Setup
Remote ID
Remote Mode Setup
2. Speaker Setup
(➔ page 59)
8. Remote Controller
Setup
(➔ page 73)
ENTER,
q/w/e/r
9. Lock Setup
(➔ page 73)
Setup
RETURN
3. Audio Adjust
(➔ page 62)
HOME
DTS
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
1
2
Audyssey DSX
Theater-Dimensional
LFE Level
press ENTER.
4. Source Setup
(➔ page 64)
Audyssey
Use q/wto select a main menu item, and then
3
4
5
IntelliVolume
press ENTER.
A/V Sync
Use q/wto select a sub menu item, and then
Name Edit
press ENTER.
Picture Adjust
Audio Selector
Use q/wto select a setting target, and use e/r
to change the setting.
5. Listening Mode Preset BD/DVD
Press HOME to close the menu.
(➔ page 68)
CBL/SAT
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.
STB/DVR
GAME
PC
Note
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver
by using HOME, the cursor buttons, and ENTER.
• During Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker
Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen
will appear on the AV receiver’s display.
AUX
TUNER
TV/CD
PHONO
NET
USB
BLUETOOTH
En-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Explanatory Notes
Note
1. Input/Output Assign
Monitor Out
• The “HDMI Through” setting is only available for the HDMI
OUT MAIN jack (➔ page 70).
2. Speaker Setup
a
b
■ Resolution
`Through:
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver
at the same resolution and with no conversion.
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select
whether or not to have the video sources’ images
If you connect your TV to HDMI output, “Monitor Out”
setting is automatically set and composite video and
Speaker Configuration
■ Subwoofer
`Yes
c
d
`No
*
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically
convert video at resolutions supported by your
TV.
component video sources are upconverted and
output.
aMain Menu
bSub Menu
Composite video,
component video
*1
`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p :
Select the desired output resolution.
cSetting target
HDMI
HDMI
dSetting options (default setting underlined)
IN
Select this for an output resolution four times
that of 1080p. Depending on the resolution
supported by your TV, it will result in either 3840
× 2160 or 4096 × 2160 pixels.
OUT
Composite video,
component video
You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT
MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture
resolution as necessary to match the resolution
supported by your TV.
Note
• See “The video and audio signal flow” (➔ page 17) for
charts showing how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution”
settings affect the video signal flow through the AV
receiver.
Sub Menu
Main Menu
Tip
• You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the
“Resolution” setting for HDMI OUT MAIN (excluding NET,
USB and BLUETOOTH input source).
■ Monitor Out
`Main:
Note
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
• With some TVs, video signals are processed in the same
way as “Through” when this setting is set to “4K”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, this setting is
fixed to “Through”.
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is
fixed to “Auto”.
MAIN.
`Sub:
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT
SUB.
`Both:
• For optimum video performance, THX recommends using
the HDMI output and setting the video resolution to
“Through”.
Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI
OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals
are output from both HDMI outputs at the
resolution supported by both TVs.
*1
When signal is 1080p input at 24 frames per second, it
will be 1080p output at 24 frames per second.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,
PHONO
`HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5, HDMI6,
HDMI7:
Select the input to which the component has
`- - - - -:
sources from the HDMI output. The video output
signal from the HDMI output is the one
configured in “Component Video Input”.
Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input
selectors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI7 have
already been assigned, you must first set any
unused input selectors to “- - - - -” or you will be
unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI7 to other input
selectors.
HDMI Input
Component Video Input
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input,
you must assign that input to an input selector. For
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
to HDMI IN 2, you must assign “HDMI2” to the
“BD/DVD” input selector.
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with
an HDMI cable, composite video and component
video sources can be upconverted and output by the
by selecting the “- - - - -” option. See “The video and
audio signal flow” for more information on video
signal flow and upconversion (➔ page 17).
If you connect a video component to a component
video input, you must assign that input to an input
selector. For example, if you connect your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN, you
must assign “IN1” to the “BD/DVD” input selector.
Here are the default assignments.
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
GAME
Default assignment
- - - - -
*
IN1
- - - - -
- - - - -
PC
- - - - -
Composite video,
component video
AUX
- - - - - (Fixed)
- - - - -
HDMI
HDMI
TV/CD
IN
PHONO
- - - - -
Note
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,
PHONO
`IN1:
Select the input to which the component has
been connected.
`- - - - -:
• If no video component is connected to the HDMI input (even
if the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the
video source based on the setting of “Component Video
Input”.
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as
explained here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority
in the “Digital Audio Input”. In this case, if you want to use
the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate
selection in the “Audio Selector” setting (➔ page 67).
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while
“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 69), otherwise
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation
will not be guaranteed.
• If you assign “- - - - -” to an input selector that is currently
selected in “HDMI Through” (➔ page 70), the “HDMI
Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.
• In order for the AV receiver to upconvert component input
to HDMI output, the source output must be set to 480i/576i.
When signal is input at resolution of 480p/576p and more,
error message will be displayed.
OUT
Composite video,
component video
Here are the default assignments.
Output composite video sources from the HDMI
output.
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
GAME
Default assignment
HDMI1
HDMI2
Note
HDMI3
• When composite video and component video sources are
upconverted for HDMI OUT SUB, only signals with a
resolution of 480i/576i are output and the resolution
remains the same. If your TV doesn’t support this
resolution, there will be no picture (➔ page 89).
• “AUX” is fixed to the “- - - - -” option.
HDMI4
PC
HDMI5
AUX
Front/MHL (Fixed)
- - - - -
TV/CD
PHONO
- - - - -
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Speakers Type (Front)
`Normal:
Select this if you’ve connected your front
speakers normally.
`Bi-Amp:
Digital Audio Input
2. Speaker Setup
If you connect a component to a digital audio input,
you must assign that input to an input selector. For
example, if you connect your CD player to the
COAXIAL IN 1, you must assign “COAXIAL1” to the
“TV/CD” input selector.
Here you can check the settings made by
®
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup function, or set them manually, which is useful
using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup function (➔ page 24).
Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front
speakers.
Here are the default assignments.
`No
`Yes:
Input selector
BD/DVD
CBL/SAT
STB/DVR
GAME
Default assignment
COAXIAL1
COAXIAL2
- - - - -
Note
• These settings are not available in either of the following
cases:
–a pair of headphones is connected.
–The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
speakers.
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 69) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
Zone 2 speakers can be used (Powered Zone 2
enabled).
- - - - -
Note
PC
- - - - -
Powered Zone 2 cannot be used.
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and
Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high
speakers cannot be used.
AUX
- - - - - (Fixed)
OPTICAL
- - - - -
TV/CD
PHONO
Speaker Settings
■ BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,
PHONO
`COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, OPTICAL:
Select the input to which the component has
been connected.
Speaker Configuration
If you change these settings, you must run
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup again (➔ page 24).
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup function (➔ page 24).
`- - - - -:
If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the
“Speakers Type (Front)” setting. For details on
speaker wire connection, see “Bi-amping the Front
Speakers” (➔ page 14).
Select if the component is connected to an
analog audio input.
With these settings, you can specify which speakers
are connected and a crossover frequency for each
speaker. Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can
output low frequency bass sounds adequately, for
example, speakers with a good sized woofer. For
smaller speakers, specify a crossover frequency.
Sounds below the crossover frequency will be output
by the subwoofer instead of the speaker. Refer to
your speaker’s manuals to determine the optimum
crossover frequencies. If you set up your speakers
using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and
Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any
THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.
Note
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in
“HDMI Input” (➔ page 58), the same HDMI IN will be set
as a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to
use the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate
selection in the “Audio Selector” (➔ page 67).
• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono)
from a digital input (optical and coaxial) are
Note
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up
to 5.1 speakers in the main room.
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.
■ Speaker Impedance
`4ohms:
Select if the impedance of any speaker is
4 ohms or more but less than 6.
`6ohms:
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit.
• “AUX” is fixed to the “- - - - -” option.
Select if the impedances of all speakers are
between 6 and 16 ohms.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*5
If anything else than “None” is selected in “Surround
Back”, this setting is automatically set to “None”.
■ Subwoofer
`Yes
Note
• When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”
setting to anything other than “Full Band”, this setting is
fixed to “- - -”.
• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the
“Subwoofer” and “Front” settings are set for the first time
to “Yes” and “Full Band” respectively.
`No
■ Surround Back Ch
`1ch:
Select if only one surround back speaker L is
connected.
`2ch:
■ Front
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.
Select if two (left and right) surround back
speakers are connected.
Note
Speaker Distance
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting
is fixed at “Full Band”.
Note
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting
cannot be selected.
*1
*1
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
■ Center , Surround
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
■ LPF of LFE
(Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)
`80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz
`Off:
Low-Pass Filter is not applied.
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff
frequency of the LFE channel’s low-pass filter
(LPF), which can be used to filter out unwanted
hum. The LPF only applies to sources that use the
LFE channel.
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker
to the listening position so that the sound from each
speaker arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound
designer intended.
`None
*1*2*3*5
■ Front High
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
■ Unit
`feet:
`None
Distances can be set in feet. Range: 1.0ft to
30.0ft in 1.0 foot steps.
`meters:
Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.30m
to 9.00m in 0.30 meter steps.
(The default setting varies from country to country.)
*1*2*3*4
■ Surround Back
`Full Band
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,
200Hz
Note
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “80Hz”.
■ Double Bass
`None
■ Left, Front High Left, Center, Front High Right,
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,
Surround Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer
`Specify the distance from each speaker to your
listening position.
Note
This setting is NOT set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup function (➔ page 24).
®
*1
“Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is
selected in the “Front” setting.
If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting
*2
cannot be selected.
If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to
`On
*3
Note
be selected.
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding
bass sounds from the front left, right, and center
channels to the subwoofer. Default setting: “- - - -”
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 59).
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and
Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high
speakers cannot be used.
*4
this setting is automatically set to “None”.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Level Calibration
Equalizer Settings
THX Audio Setup
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of
speakers individually with a 5-band equalizer. The
volume of each speaker can be set.
■ Surr Back Speaker Spacing
`<1ft (<0.3m)
`1ft-4ft (0.3m-1.2m)
`>4ft (>1.2m)
You can specify the distance between your surround
back speakers.
This setting is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup function (➔ page 24).
®
■ Manual Equalizer
`On:
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with
the built-in test tone so that the volume of each
speaker is the same at the listening position.
You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker
Note
Press wto select “Channel”, and then use
• Cannot be set if:
*1
1
■ Left, Front High Left, Center , Front High Right,
–“Surround Back” is set to “None” (➔ page 60).
–“Surround Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (➔ page 60).
–“Powered Zone 2” is set to “Yes” (➔ page 59) and
e/rto select a speaker.
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,
Surround Back Left, Surround Left
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
Use q/wto select a frequency, and then use
2
the e/rto adjust the level at that frequency.
The volume at each frequency can be adjusted
from –6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps.
*1
■ Subwoofer
■ THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer
`No
`Yes
`–15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.
Tip
Note
“16kHz”. And for the subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”,
“63Hz”, “100Hz”, or “160Hz”.
• Low frequencies (e.g., 63 Hz) affect bass sounds; high
frequencies (e.g., 16 kHz) affect treble sounds.
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set this
setting to “Yes”.
• These settings cannot be calibrated when the AV receiver
is muted.
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (➔ page 59).
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and
Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high
speakers cannot be used.
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which
is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen
at volume settings below this, be careful because the test
tone will be much louder.
Note
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot
be selected (➔ page 60).
Use qto select “Channel”, and then use e/r
3
to select another speaker.
■ BGC
`Off
`On
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No”
or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration”
(➔ page 59).
If your listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic
reasons) locates most of the listeners close to the
rear wall, the resulting bass level can be sufficiently
reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound
becomes “boomy”. THX Select2 Plus receivers
contain a Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC)
feature to improve bass balance.
*1
For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings
(➔ page 54).
`Off:
Tone off, response flat.
Tip
• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the
level of each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the
listening position, measured with C-weighting and slow
reading.
Note
• When the Direct or Pure Audio (European, Australian,
and Asian models) listening mode is selected, the
equalizer settings have no effect.
• If “Audyssey” is enabled, it prevails over this setting
Note
• This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot
be selected (➔ page 60).
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Loudness Plus
`Off
Dolby
3. Audio Adjust
■ PL IIx Music (2ch Input)
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo
sources.
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro
`On
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.
When the “Loudness Plus” setting is set to “On”, it is
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio
expression at low volume. This is only available when
the THX listening mode is selected.
Multiplex/Mono
■ Multiplex
■ Preserve THX Settings
`Yes
`No
If this setting is set to “Yes”, Dynamic EQ and
Dynamic Volume have no effect in THX listening
mode.
Input Channel
`Main
`Sub
`Main/Sub
This setting determines which channel of a stereo
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio
channels or languages with multiplex sources,
multilingual TV broadcasts, and so on.
Panorama
`On
`Off
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the
front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Music listening mode.
Note
Dimension
`–3 to 0 to +3
• This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to
“On”.
With this setting, you can move the sound field
forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music listening mode. Higher settings move the
sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward.
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much
surround sound, move the sound field forward to
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround
sound, move it backward.
■ Mono
Input Channel
`Left + Right
`Left
`Right
This setting specifies the channel to be used for
playing any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby
Digital, or 2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono
listening mode.
THX Loudness Plus
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control
technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX
Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX
Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now
experience the rich details in a surround mix at any
volume level. A consequence of turning the volume
below Reference Level is that certain sound elements
can be lost or perceived differently by the listener.
THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and
spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced
by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel
levels and frequency response. This enables users
experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless
of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is
automatically applied when listening in any THX
listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music,
and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the
proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of
content.
Center Width
`0 to 3 to 7
Output Speaker
`Center:
Mono audio is output by the center speaker.
`Left / Right:
Mono audio is output by the front left and right
speakers.
This setting determines which speakers output mono
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the
sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re
using a center speaker, the center channel sound is
output from only the center speaker. (If you’re not
using a center speaker, the center channel sound will
be distributed to the front left and right speakers to
create a phantom center.) This setting controls the
front left, right, and center mix, allowing you to adjust
the weight of the center channel sound.
Note
• If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (➔ page 60), this
setting cannot be selected.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ PL IIz Height Gain
■ TrueHD Loudness Management
Theater-Dimensional
`Low
`Off
■ Listening Angle
`Mid
`On
`Wide:
`High
This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late
Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source.
Select if the listening angle is greater than 30
degrees.
`Narrow:
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz
enables the listener to select how much gain is
applied to the front high speakers. There are three
settings, “Low”, “Mid” and “High”, and the front high
speakers are accentuated in that order. While “Mid” is
the default listening setting, the listener may adjust
the Height Gain Control to their personal preference.
Note
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Late Night function for
Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to “Off”.
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Dialogue Normalization
information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources.
Select if the listening angle is less than 30
degrees.
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-
Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of
the front left and right speakers relative to the
listening position. Ideally, the front left and right
speakers should be equidistant from the listening
position and at an angle close to one of the two
available settings.
DTS
Note
• If the “Front High” settings is set to “None” (➔ page 60),
this setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2
is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
■ Neo:6 Music
Center Image
`0 to 2 to 5
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-
channel surround sound from 2-channel stereo
sources. With this setting, you can specify by how
much the front left and right channel output is
attenuated in order to create the center channel.
Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the
sound of the center channel to left and right
(outwards).
■ Dolby EX
`Auto:
Front left speaker
Front right speaker
If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the
Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is
used.
Listening angle: 30°
`Manual:
You can select any available listening mode.
signals are handled. This setting is unavailable if no
surround back speakers are connected. This setting
is effective with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and
Dolby TrueHD only.
Note
• For best results, we recommend setting “Narrow” to 20°
and “Wide” to 40°.
®
Audyssey DSX
LFE Level
■ Soundstage
`–3dB to Reference to +3dB
With this setting, you can adjust the sound stage when
using Audyssey DSX.
Note
*1
*2
■ Dolby Digital , DTS , Multich PCM, Dolby
*3
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”
(➔ page 60), this setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2
is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.
• If the “Front High” setting is enabled (➔ page 60), this
setting is fixed to “Manual”.
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD
`–QdB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB
Note
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for each
input sources.
• This listening mode can be selected only when all the
following conditions are satisfied:
–The center speaker is connected.
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud
when using one of these sources, change the setting
to –20 dB or –QdB.
–The front high speakers are connected.
–Powered Zone 2 is not in use.
*1
Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources
Operating
procedure
En-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(➔ page 56)
Advanced Operations
*2
*3
DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources
DSD (Super Audio CD) sources
■ Dynamic EQ
`Off
`On:
at reference level when the master volume control is
set to the 0 dB position. At that level you can hear the
mix as the mixers heard it.
®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard
film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the
reference response and surround envelopment when
the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film
reference level is not always used in music or other
non-film content. Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference
Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level
reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be
selected when the mix level of the content is not
within the standard.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ becomes active.
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.
4. Source Setup
Items can be set individually for each input selector.
Press the input selector buttons to select an input
source.
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great
sound even when listening at low volume levels.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. It does so by selecting the correct
frequency response and surround volume levels
moment-by-moment so that the content sounds the
way it was created at any volume level — not just at
reference level.
®
Audyssey
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker
Setup. To enable the following settings, you must first
perform the Room Correction and Speaker Setup
(➔ page 24).
®
Note
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology
cannot be used.
• These technologies cannot be used when a pair of
headphones is connected.
■ Reference Level
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset
■ Dynamic Volume
`0dB:
`Off
`Light:
■ Audyssey
`Off
`Movie:
Select this setting for movie material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
`Music:
This should be selected for movie contents.
`5dB:
Select this setting for content that has a very
wide dynamic range, such as classical music.
`10dB:
Select this setting for jazz or other music that
has a wider dynamic range. This setting should
also be selected for TV content as that is usually
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.
`15dB:
Activates Light Compression Mode.
`Medium:
Activates Medium Compression Mode.
`Heavy:
Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This
setting affects volume the most. It quiets the
loud parts, such as explosions, and boosts the
quiet parts so they can be heard.
Select this setting for music material.
The Audyssey indicator will light.
Note
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.
• Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources.
Note
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other
program material that is mixed at very high
listening levels and has a compressed dynamic
range.
• If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® with THX listening modes, set
the “Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set “Preserve
THX Settings” to “No” (➔ page 62).
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film
reference. To achieve the same reference level in a
home theater system each speaker level must be
adjusted so that –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to
2000 Hz) pink noise produces 75 dB sound pressure
level at the listening position. A home theater system
automatically calibrated by Audyssey MultEQ will play
• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set
to “On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.
• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is
automatically switched to “Off”.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
®
–“HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (➔ page 69) and
you’re listening through your TV speakers.
• A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio (European,
Australian and Asian models) or Direct listening mode is
used with an analog input source.
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ
IntelliVolume
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by
taking into account human perception and room
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at
any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass
response, tonal balance and surround impression
that remain constant despite changes in volume.
Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming
source levels with actual output sound levels in the
room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness
■ IntelliVolume
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for
each input selector individually. This is useful if one of
your source components is louder or quieter than the
others.
• This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and
BLUETOOTH input selectors.
Name Edit
Use e/rto set the level.
You can enter a custom name for each individual
input selector and radio preset for easy identification.
When entered, the custom name will appear on the
display.
The custom name is edited using the keyboard
If a component is noticeably louder than the others,
use eto reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably
quieter, use rto increase its input level.
correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in
®
tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-
Note
balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
• IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2/3.
®
■ Name
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume
A/V Sync
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of
large variations in volume level between television
programs, commercials, and between the soft and
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at
the preferred volume setting by the user and then
monitors how the volume of program material is being
perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether
an adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary,
Dynamic Volume makes the necessary rapid or
gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback
volume level while optimizing the dynamic range.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then
1
■ A/V Sync
press ENTER.
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.
`0msec to 800msec in 10 msec steps
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and
sound are out of sync. With this setting, you can
correct this by delaying the audio signals.
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting the
delay when the video source is output to HDMI OUT
MAIN.
To store a name when you’re done, be sure to
2
select “OK” by using q/w/e/r, and then press
ENTER.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,
tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity
remain the same whether watching movies, flipping
between television channels or changing from stereo
to surround sound content.
The range of values you can adjust will depend on
whether your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync
and if the “Lip Sync” setting is set to “On” or not
(➔ page 71).
Note
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:
–The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”
(➔ page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to
“On” (➔ page 71) and you’re listening through your TV
speakers.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
mode. See “Monitor Out” for details on the
Picture Adjust
Name input area
monitor output setting (➔ page 57).
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture
quality and reduce any noise appearing on the
screen.
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting
when the video source is output to HDMI OUT MAIN.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
4 - 4. Name Edit
Name
BD/DVD
*1
■ Picture Mode
`Custom:
All settings can be performed manually.
`Cinema:
Select when the picture source is a movie or
a
n
b
o
c
p
d
q
e
r
f
g
t
h
u
i
j
k
x
l
m
z
s
v
9
w
0
y
^
1
,
2
.
3
/
4
;
5
:
6
@
7
[
8
]
–
\
Space
Shift
Back Space
OK
alike.
`Game:
*1*6
■ Wide Mode
+10
Shift
CLR
All Erase
This setting determines the aspect ratio.
Select when the video source is a game
console.
`Standard:
`4:3:
A
N
!
B
O
˝
C
P
#
D
Q
$
E
R
F
S
&
`
G
T
’
H
I
J
K
L
M
U
(
V
)
W
_
X
=
Y
˜
Z
|
%
Does not adjust picture quality (changes
resolution).
<
>
?
+
{
}
Space
Shift
Back Space
OK
`Bypass:
+10
Shift
CLR
All Erase
Does not adjust picture quality (does not change
resolution).
*1
*2
`Full:
a
b
c d
e
With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following
settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen
by one operation: “Game Mode”, “Film Mode”, “Edge
Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Brightness”,
“Contrast”, “Hue”, “Saturation” or “Color
Temperature”.
a Toggles between lower and upper case
*1
characters.
b Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input
area.
c Moves the cursor backward and deletes one
`Zoom:
*2
character.
*2*3*4
■ Game Mode
d Enters a space character.
`Off
`On
e Confirms your entry.
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video
component (i.e., game console), select the
corresponding input source and set the “Game Mode”
setting to “On”. The delay will decrease but in return
the picture quality will become poor.
Tip
• To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM,
and then select the preset (➔ page 38).
• To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with
CLR, select “OK” and then press ENTER.
`Wide Zoom:
*1
This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote
controller.
*2
Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the
characters you have input.
Note
According to the input signals and monitor
output setting, the AV receiver automatically
selects the “4:3”, “Full”, “Zoom” or “Wide Zoom”
• This setting cannot be used for the NET, USB and
BLUETOOTH input selectors.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
*2*4
*1*2*4
■ Hue
■ Film Mode
Audio Selector
`Video:
`–50 to 0 to +50
“Film Mode” detection is not applied and the
input signal is handled as a video source.
■ Audio Selector
`ARC:
With this setting, you can adjust the color hue
between “–50” and “+50”.
`Auto:
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.
With this selection, the TV’s audio can be
automatically selected as a priority among other
assignments.
*1*2*4
*1
Detects whether the input signal is a video or a
movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate
conversion is applied.
With this setting, you can adjust saturation. “–50” is
the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.
The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,
automatically converting it to the appropriate
progressive signal and reproducing the natural quality
of the original picture.
*2*4
`HDMI:
■ Color Temperature
`Warm
This can be selected when HDMI IN has been
assigned as an input source. If both HDMI
(HDMI IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN
or OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI
input is automatically selected as a priority.
`COAXIAL:
`Normal
`Cool
*2*4*5
■ Edge Enhancement
`Off
`Low
`Mid
With this setting, you can adjust the color
temperature.
Note
This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has
been assigned as an input source. If both
coaxial and HDMI inputs have been assigned,
coaxial input is automatically selected as a
priority.
`High
• “Picture Adjust” cannot be used when:
–The NET, USB or BLUETOOTH input selector is
selected, or
–“Monitor Out” is set to “Sub”.
This procedure can also be performed on the remote
With this setting, you can make the picture appear
sharper.
*2*4*5
■ Noise Reduction
`Off
`Low
`Mid
*1
`OPTICAL:
controller by using the Quick Setup (➔ page 52).
When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to anything other
than “Custom”, this setting cannot be used.
If the “Resolution” setting is set to “4K” (➔ page 57),
this setting is fixed at “Off”.
Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.
If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On”, this setting is
fixed at “Off”.
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has
been assigned as an input source. If both optical
and HDMI inputs have been assigned, optical
input is automatically selected as a priority.
`Analog:
The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.
You can set priorities of audio output when there are
both digital and analog inputs.
*2
*3
`High
With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on
the screen. Select the desired level.
*4
*5
*1*2*4
■ Brightness
`–50 to 0 to +50
With this setting, you can adjust the picture
*6
When a 3D video source is input, “Wide Mode” is fixed to
“Full”.
Note
• This setting can be made only for an input source that is
assigned to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.
• This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and
BLUETOOTH input selectors.
• When using the Whole House Mode, “Audio Selector” is
fixed to “Analog”.
*1*2*4
■ Contrast
`–50 to 0 to +50
*1
You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input
selector. But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the
“Audio Return Channel” setting (➔ page 71).
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed
Mode)
• For the “BLUETOOTH” input selector, only “Digital” is
available.
5. Listening Mode Preset
You can assign a default listening mode to each input
source that will be selected automatically when you
the default listening mode to be used with Dolby
Digital input signals. You can select other listening
modes during playback, but the mode specified here
will be resumed once the AV receiver has been set to
standby.
■ Analog/PCM/Digital
■ Fixed Mode
`Off:
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD,
turntable, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or
PCM digital (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.
The format is detected automatically. If no digital
input signal is present, the corresponding analog
input is used instead.
`PCM:
Note
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM
indicator will flash and noise may also be
produced.
• For the “AUX” input selector, only “PCM” is available.
■ Mono/Multiplex Source
Use q/wto select the input source that you
1
want to set, and then press ENTER.
The following menu appears.
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when a mono digital audio signal is played
`DTS:
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals
will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the
dts indicator will flash and there will be no
sound.
5-1. Listening Mode Preset
BD/DVD
■ 2ch Source
Analog/PCM
Mono/Multiplex Source
2ch Source
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
Other Multich Source
Last Valid e r
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources,
such as Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
Last Valid
When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected
in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify
the signal type in “Fixed Mode”.
■ Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD
Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources.
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus
format digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.).
Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby
TrueHD sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input
via HDMI).
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format
automatically. However, if you experience either of
the following issues when playing PCM or DTS
material, you can manually set the signal format to
PCM or DTS.
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are
cut off, try setting the format to PCM.
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or
reversing a DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.
Use q/wto select the signal format that you
want to set, and then use e/rto select a
listening mode.
2
Only listening modes that can be used with each
input signal format can be selected (➔ pages 41
to 48).
■ DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode
used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format
digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD,
etc.). Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-
HD Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD
DVD (input via HDMI).
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening
mode selected last will be used.
The “Straight Decode” option means that
straight decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital,
DTS, etc.) is selected.
Note
• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the
setting in “Audio Selector”.
Note
■ Other Multich Source
• For the “TUNER” input selector, only “Analog” will be
available.
• For the “NET” or “USB” input selector, “Digital” and
“TrueHD“ will be available.
Specifies the default listening mode for
multichannel PCM sources from HDMI IN such as
DVD-Audio, and DSD multichannel sources such
as Super Audio CD.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Headphone Level
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB
With this setting, you can specify the headphone
volume relative to the main volume. This is useful if
there’s a volume difference between your speakers
and your headphones.
6. Miscellaneous
Volume Setup
7. Hardware Setup
Tuner
■ Volume Display
`Absolute:
■ AM/FM Frequency Step (North American and
Taiwanese models)
Displayed range is Min, 1 to 99, Max.
`Relative (THX):
`10kHz/200kHz:
OSD Setup
Select the frequency step according to your
area.
Displayed range is –QdB, –81dB to +18dB.
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level
is displayed.
■ On Screen Display
`On
`Off
This preference determines whether operation details
are displayed on-screen when an AV receiver
function is adjusted.
■ AM Frequency Step (European, Australian and
Asian models)
`10kHz:
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative
value 0 dB.
Note
Select the frequency step according to your
area.
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify
the AM/FM frequency step used in your area.
• If the absolute value is set to 82, “82Ref” will appear on the
display and the THX indicator will flash.
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may
not be output if the input source is connected to an
HDMI IN.
■ Muting Level
`–QdB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB
■ Language
Note
steps.
(North American models)
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska
This setting determines how much the output is muted
when the muting function is used (➔ page 50).
• When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be
deleted.
■ Maximum Volume
`Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)
`Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.
To disable this setting, select “Off”.
(European, Australian and Asian models)
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska, Русский язык, 中文
HDMI
■ HDMI CEC (RIHD)
`Off
`On
Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible
components connected via HDMI to be controlled by
the AV receiver (➔ page 16).
(Taiwanese models)
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,
Nederlands, Svenska, 中文
This setting determines the language used for the on-
screen menus.
■ Power On Volume
`Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)
`Last, –QdB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)
With this preference, you can specify the volume
setting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned
on.
To use the same volume level that was used when
the AV receiver was turned off, select “Last”.
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher
than the “Maximum Volume” setting.
■ Screen Saver
`3min, 5min, 10min
`Off
With this setting, you can set the time until the screen
saver activates itself. Once active, the screen saver
will go off and the screen will return to its previous
state if the AV receiver is operated in any way.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ HDMI Through
`Off
`BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, AUX,
TV/CD, PHONO:
Selects the input source for which the HDMI
Through function is enabled.
`Last:
■ Audio TV Out (Main)
`Off
`On
This preference determines whether the incoming
audio signal is output from HDMI OUT MAIN. You
may want to turn this preference on if your TV is
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN and you want to listen
to the audio from a connected component through
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to
“Off”.
Note
• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the
names of connected p-compatible components and
“RIHD On” are displayed on the AV receiver.
“Search…” → “(name)” → “RIHD On”
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the
component, it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc.
(“*” shows up and indicates the number of components,
when two or more are received).
The HDMI Through function is activated on the
input source selected at the time of setting the
AV receiver to standby mode.
the AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the
connected component is displayed on the AV receiver
display. For example, while you are watching TV
broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player
(being powered on) with the remote control of the AV
receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will be
displayed on the AV receiver.
• Set it to “Off” when a connected piece of equipment is not
compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is
compatible or not.
• If operation is not normal when set to “On”, change the
setting to “Off”.
When enabling the HDMI Through function,
regardless of whether the AV receiver is on or in
standby, both audio and video streams from an HDMI
input will be output to the TV or other components via
HDMI connection. The HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit
in standby mode. Note that the indicator may not light
under certain conditions (➔ page 22).
This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the
above “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,
resulting in automatic input source selection.
Note
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s
display by pressing DISPLAY.
• When “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On”, this setting is
fixed to “Auto”.
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Monitor Out” is set to
“Sub” (➔ page 57).
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output
even when this setting is set to “On”.
Note
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• When the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter
standby mode as usual.)
• When “Audio TV Out (Main)” or “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set
to “On” and you’re listening through your TV’s speakers,
turning up the AV receiver’s volume control will make the
sound be output from the AV receiver’s front left and right
speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing
sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or
turn down the AV receiver’s volume.
• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via
“HDMI Input” setting is enabled (➔ page 58).
• The power consumption in standby mode will increase
during the HDMI Through function; however in the following
cases, the power consumption can be saved:
–The TV is in standby mode.
–You are watching a TV program.
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for
details.
• Depending on the connected component, the correct input
source may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.
• The pcontrol does not support HDMI OUT SUB.
Use HDMI OUT MAIN instead.
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.
• When the source equipment is connected with the u
connection, it may malfunction if “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set
to “On”.
• If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the
TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,
(When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the audio cannot be
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver.
• This function is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN jack.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
■ Audio TV Out (Sub)
■ Audio Return Channel
■ InstaPrevue
`Off
`On
`Off
`Auto:
These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home
menu (➔ page 51) and specify the preview display of
HDMI video streams.
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an
ARC capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI
OUT MAIN of the AV receiver. To use this function,
you must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV
must be ARC capable. The ARC indicator will light
when the audio signal is detected. Default setting:
“- - - -”
This preference determines whether the incoming
audio signal is output from HDMI OUT SUB. You may
want to turn this preference on if your TV is
connected to HDMI OUT SUB and you want to listen
to the audio from a connected component through
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to
“Off”.
Sub Window
`Multi:
Displays preview thumbnails all at once.
Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.
With this setting, you can set the number of preview
thumbnails displayed.
Note
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s
display by pressing DISPLAY.
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Monitor Out” is set to
“Main” (➔ page 57).
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both” (➔ page 57), and this
setting is enabled, set audio output of source component to
2ch PCM.
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output
even when this setting is set to “On”.
Position
Note
(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)
(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)
`Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower
Right
• This setting is fixed to “- - - -” when the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)”
setting is set to “Off”.
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.
• If you set “Audio Return Channel” to “Auto”, the “Audio
Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be
automatically switched to “ARC” (➔ page 67).
With this setting, you can set the position of preview
thumbnails on the TV screen.
Tip
Note
• After changing the settings of the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)”,
“HDMI Through” or “Audio Return Channel”, turn off the
power on all connected pieces of equipment and then turn
them on again. Refer to the user’s manuals for all
connected pieces of equipment.
• When “Audio TV Out (Sub)” is set to “On” and you’re
listening through your TV’s speakers, turning up the AV
receiver’s volume control will make the sound be output
from the AV receiver’s front left and right speakers. To stop
the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the
settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV
receiver’s volume.
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both” (➔ page 57) and only
“Audio TV Out (Sub)” is set to “On”, the audio is not output
from the TV connected to HDMI OUT SUB except in the
case the audio input is via HDMI.
• If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the
TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers
connected to the AV receiver.
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of
InstaPrevue.
Auto Standby
■ Lip Sync
`Off
`On
■ Auto Standby
`Off
`On
When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the ASb
indicator lights and the AV receiver will automatically
enter standby mode if there is no operation for 30
minutes with no audio and no video signal input.
“Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s
display and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto
Standby comes on.
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically
correct any delay between the video and the audio,
based on the data from the connected monitor.
Note
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV
supports HDMI Lip Sync.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Default setting: On (European, Australian and
Asian models), Off (North American and
Taiwanese models)
■ MAC Address
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access
Control) address. This address cannot be changed.
Network
This section explains how to configure the AV
receiver’s network settings manually.
Note
■ DHCP
`Enable
`Disable
After modifying the network settings, you must
confirm the changes by executing “Save”.
need to change any of these settings, as the AV
receiver is set to use DHCP to configure itself
automatically by default (i.e., DHCP is set to
“Enable”). If, however, your router’s DHCP server is
disabled (you’re for example using static IP), you’ll
need to configure these settings yourself, in which
case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is
essential.
• Set to “On”, the Auto Standby function may activate itself
during playback with some sources.
• The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2/3 is
on.
This setting determines whether or not the AV
receiver uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server
settings.
■ HDMI Through
`Off
`On
Note
This setting enables or disables the Auto Standby
during HDMI Through by detecting the audio/video
input signal.
When this setting is set to “On”, the AV receiver will
automatically enter standby mode if there is no audio
and no video signal input during HDMI Through for 30
minutes. (The Auto Standby function does not work when
Zone 2/3 is on.)
• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server”
settings yourself.
What’s DHCP?
■ IP Address
`Class A:
“10.0.0.0” to “10.255.255.255”
`Class B:
“172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”
`Class C:
“192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”
Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet
Service Provider (ISP).
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other
devices to automatically configure themselves on a
network.
What’s DNS?
When this setting is set to “Off”, the status of HDMI
Through is continued regardless of audio/video input
signal.
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain
names into IP addresses. For example, when you
enter a domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in
your Web browser, before accessing the site, your
browser uses DNS to translate this into an IP
address, in this case 63.148.251.142.
Tip
• Entering standby mode is possible by setting “HDMI CEC
(RIHD)” to “On” and using CEC-compatible component
regardless of the above-mentioned setting.
See “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” in “7. Hardware Setup” for linked
operation (➔ page 69).
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.
■ Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP
(typically 255.255.255.0).
■ Network Connection
`Wired
`Wireless
This setting determines whether you connect the AV
receiver to network by wired LAN or wireless LAN. If
you connect by wireless LAN, select “Wireless”. See
“Performing Wireless LAN Setup” for setting
(➔ page 27).
• When the HDMI Through is enabled, the power
consumption slightly increases.
■ Gateway
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.
Note
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Auto Standby” is set to
“Off”.
■ DNS Server
Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.
■ Proxy URL
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.
Tip
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is selected
in “Network Connection” in initial setup (➔ page 23).
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
• For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.
• The pairing can be done by holding down BLUETOOTH
button on the AV receiver until BLUETOOTH indicator
flashes.
■ Proxy Port
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port
number here.
8. Remote Controller Setup
Remote ID
■ Network Standby
`On
`Off
This setting enables or disables control over the
network.
When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit
while the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that
(➔ page 22).
■ Remote ID
`1, 2, or 3
When several Onkyo components are used in the
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To
differentiate the AV receiver from other components,
you can change its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.
Note
• This setting cannot be selected if you’ve selected NET or
USB as input selector in Multi Zone.
Initial Setup
If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on
first-time use, you can reaccess it from here.
See “Initial Setup” (➔ page 22).
Note
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to
change the remote controller to the same ID (see below),
otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with the remote
controller.
Note
Note
• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly
increases in standby mode.
• This setting cannot be selected if the “Monitor Out” setting
is set to “Sub”.
Changing the remote controller’s ID
■ Update Notice
`Enable
`Disable
While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down Q SETUP until the remote indicator
lights (about 3 seconds).
1
When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a
firmware update via network of high importance is
available.
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.
The remote indicator flashes twice.
2
Note
• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window
will switch this setting to “Disable” (➔ page 22).
• For details on the update notification, see “Firmware
Update Notification” (➔ page 22).
Remote Mode Setup
See “Looking up for Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 76).
■ Bluetooth
This setting enables the AV receiver to pair with
Bluetooth-enabled device.
9. Lock Setup
With this preference, you can protect your settings by
locking the setup menus.
Status
Press ENTER button to display “Now Pairing” and
start pairing.
■ Setup
`Locked
`Unlocked
When “Locked” is selected, the setup menus will be
locked and you cannot change any setting.
Tip
• If pairing setting is not set, “Ready” appears on-screen
display. The name of the device paired with the AV receiver
is displayed if pairing setting is set.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Multi Zone
In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And, you can select a different source for each room.
Making Multi Zone Connections
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly to the AV receiver
Connecting the Zone Speakers to an Additional Amplifier
This setup allows you to select different sources for Main room and Zone 2. This is
called Powered Zone, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV receiver.
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main listening room and 2-channel
stereo playback in Zone 2/3.
To use this setup, you must activate the Powered Zone 2 setting (➔ page 59).
Main room
Main room
TV
TV
AV receiver
AV receiver
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 2
IN
IN
R
L
R
L
R
L
Receiver/
Receiver/
integrated amp
integrated amp
Note
• The volume of Zone 2/3 must be set on the Zone 2/3 amplifier.
Note
• With this setup, the volume of Zone 2 is controlled by the AV receiver.
• When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is reduced to 5.1 channels.
En-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Operations
Muting Zone 2
Controlling Multi Zone Components
8RECEIVER
■ Operating on the remote controller
■ Operating on the AV receiver
INPUT
SELECTOR
Input selector buttons
Press ZONE2 followed by MUTING.
1
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
MASTER VOLUME
MUTING
ZONE2
ZONE3
VOLq/w
Tip
• To unmute, press ZONE2 followed by MUTING again.
Zone can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.
Press ZONE2 or ZONE3, then point the remote
controller at the AV receiver and press
8RECEIVER.
1
Note
• Only analog, NET or USB input source is output from the
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks and ZONE 2 L/R
terminals.
main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station
will be heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an
FM station for the main room, that station will also be output
in Zone 2/3.
• You cannot select different input selector NET or USB for
your main room and Zone 2/3. Namely, if you have selected
USB input selector for Zone 2/3, USB input selector will be
selected in main room even if NET has been selected for
main room.
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on
the AV receiver’s display.
8ON/STANDBY
Tip
To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press
ZONE2 or ZONE3, followed by an INPUT
SELECTOR button.
2
3
• The Whole House Mode function shares the input source of
main room with Multi Zone (➔ page 50).
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE2 or ZONE3,
followed by 8RECEIVER.
To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source,
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input
selector button within 8 seconds.
1
The zone is turned off.
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on
the AV receiver’s display.
Adjusting the Volume for Zone 2
• BLUETOOTH cannot be selected as input selector in Multi
Zone. If you play audio from Bluetooth-enabled device in
Multi Zone, select “Z2 Sel: Source” or “Z3 Sel: Source”,
and BLUETOOTH as input selector in Main room.
• When Zone 2/3 is activated and its input selector is
selected, the power consumption of standby mode slightly
increases.
• While Zone 2/3 is on, ufunctions will not work.
• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone
2/3 is active, the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit.
• Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode
is set to Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian
models) will automatically switch it to Direct.
• “AUX” cannot be selected as input sources for Zone 2/3.
• When “AUX” is the input source of Main room and Zone 2/3
is set to share the same source, no sound will be output
from Zone 2/3.
To select the same source as the main room’s,
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Z2 Sel:
Source” or “Z3 Sel: Source” appears on the AV
receiver’s display.
■ Operating on the remote controller
Press ZONE2.
1
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3
Use VOL q/w.
2
2
followed by 8ON/STANDBY within 8 seconds.
The zone is turned off.
■ Operating on the AV receiver
■ Operating on the remote controller
To control Zone 2/3, you must press ZONE2 or
ZONE3 on the remote controller first.
Press ZONE 2 (the Z2 indicator on the AV
receiver’s display flashes).
1
Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8
seconds.
2
If your Zone 2 speakers are connected to a receiver
or integrated amplifier in Zone 2, use its volume
control to adjust the volume.
En-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
Use q/wto select “Remote Controller Setup”,
Entering Remote Control Codes
Controlling Other
Components
3
4
5
and then press ENTER.
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that
you want to control.
Use q/wto select “Remote Mode Setup”, and
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to
control your other AV components, including those
made by other manufacturers. This section explains
how to enter the remote control code for a component
that you want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.
then press ENTER.
Look up the appropriate remote control code
Use q/wto select a remote mode, and then
1
in the separate Remote Control Codes list.
The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD
player, TV, etc.).
press ENTER.
The menu of category selection appears.
Use q/wto select a category, and then press
6
7
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
ENTER.
2
Preprogrammed Remote Control
Codes
button to which you want to assign a code,
press and hold down DISPLAY (about 3
seconds).
The keyboard screen for brand name input
appears.
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are
preprogrammed with remote control codes for
controlling the components listed. You do not need to
enter a remote control code to control these
components.
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then
The remote indicator lights.
press ENTER.
Note
Repeat this step for the first three characters of
the brand name.
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for
RECEIVER and the multi zone button.
When you have entered the 3rd character, select
“Search” and press ENTER.
A list of brand names is retrieved.
If the desired brand name is not found:
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.
• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,
remote control codes from any category can be
assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However,
these buttons also work as input selector buttons, so
choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds
with the input to which you connect your component.
For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose TV/CD when entering its remote control
code.
For details on controlling these components, see the
indicated pages.
BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (➔ page 78)
Use rto select “Not Listed”, and then press
TV/CD
Onkyo CD player (➔ page 77)
ENTER.
STB/DVR Apple TV
The keyboard screen for brand name input
appears.
Use q/wto select a brand, and then press
ENTER.
Looking up for Remote Control Codes
8
9
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to
3
You can look up for an appropriate remote control
code from the on-screen menu.
enter the 5-digit remote control code.
The remote indicator flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered
successfully, the remote indicator will flash once
slowly.
A remote control code with its instructions are
displayed. Follow the procedure.
Note
If you can control the component, use q/wto
select “OK”, and then press ENTER.
The on-screen menu returns to the “Remote
Mode Setup” front screen.
• You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.
Note
1
If you cannot control the component, use q/w
to select “Try Next Code” and press ENTER.
The next code is displayed.
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at
the time of release, they are subject to change.
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then
2
press ENTER.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
`32901/33104/33504:
Onkyo HD DVD player
`70868:
Remapping Colored Buttons
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo
Components Connected via RI
You can change the configuration of colored buttons,
with which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.
Onkyo MD recorder without u
Onkyo components that are connected via uare
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV
receiver, not the component. This allows you to
control components that are out of view, in a rack, for
example.
`71323:
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
Onkyo CD recorder without u
1
button that you want to program, press and
hold down A (Red) until the remote indicator
lights (about 3 seconds).
`82990:
Onkyo Dock without u
You can only change colored buttons for
components whose codes belong to categories
player, TV, cable set-top box, etc).
Make sure the Onkyo component is connected
1
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons
with an ucable and an analog audio cable
(RCA).
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default
remote control code.
See “Connecting Onkyo RI Components” for
details (➔ page 20).
Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons
2
The button presses are assigned to each button
from left to right. The remote indicator flashes
twice, indicating that the sequence has been
successfully assigned. If the sequence is not
successfully assigned, the remote indicator will
flash once slowly.
While holding down the REMOTE MODE
Enter the appropriate remote control code for
a REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the
previous section.
2
button that you want to reset, press and hold
down HOME until the remote indicator lights
(about 3 seconds).
`42157:
Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE
button again.
Onkyo cassette tape deck with u
2
`81993:
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that
the button has been reset.
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed
with a remote control code. When a button is
reset, its preprogrammed code is restored.
Onkyo Dock with u
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the
remote controller at the AV receiver, and
operate the component.
Tip
3
• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default
settings, see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons”.
Note
Controlling Onkyo components without u
If you want to control an Onkyo component by
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you
connected via u, use the following remote control
codes:
• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the
operation will be cancelled.
• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in
Receiver mode or when Zone 2/3 is active.
Resetting the Remote Controller
You can reset the remote controller to its default
settings.
While holding down RECEIVER, press and
hold down HOME until the remote indicator
lights (about 3 seconds).
1
`30627:
Onkyo DVD player without u
`71817:
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that
the remote controller has been reset.
2
Onkyo CD player without u
`32900/33100/33500:
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player
En-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
Controlling MHL-Enabled Mobile Device
Controlling Other Components
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
By programming the supplied remote controller with
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to
operate your MHL-enabled mobile device.
Connect your MHL-enabled mobile device to the AUX
INPUT MHL jack. We advise you to program the
remote control code on the AUX button.
Use the following remote control codes:
(North American and Taiwanese models)
`33101:
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
component, you can control your component as
described below.
For details on entering a remote control code for other
components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”
(➔ page 76).
h
i
Controlling a TV
MHL-enabled mobile device
(European, Australian, and Asian models)
`32910:
j
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code
*1
for controlling a TV that supports the p
a
b
(limited to some models). The TV must be able to
receive remote control commands via pand
be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. If
controlling your TV via pdoesn’t work very
well, program your TV’s remote control code into TV
and use the TV remote mode to control your TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
`11807/13100/13500:
MHL-enabled mobile device
k
l
Note
• With some mobile devices, reliable operation cannot be
guaranteed.
c
d
m
n
Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD
DVD Player or DVD Recorder
BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control
code for controlling a component that supports the
TV with p
e
f
*1
p
(limited to some models). The component
Controlling Apple TV
must be able to receive remote control commands via
pand be connected to the AV receiver via
HDMI.
By programming the supplied remote controller with
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to
operate your Apple TV.
Use the following remote control codes:
`32910/33101/33501/31612:
g
`02615:
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p
Apple TV
o
*1
The psupported by the AV receiver is the CEC
system control function of the HDMI standard.
En-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
■ TV operation
■ DVD player/DVD recorder operation
■ Satellite receiver/Cable receiver operation
Available buttons
Available buttons
TOP MENU
Available buttons
GUIDE
Number: 1 to 9, 0
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w g
b
h 8SOURCE
b
h 8SOURCE
Number: +10*1
DISPLAY
MUTING
CH +/–
GUIDE
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
b
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i
j
l
m
n
o
SETUP
MUTING
SETUP
MUTING
d
j
d
j
SETUP
CH +/–
CH +/–
d
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
k
k
7, 6
DISC +/–
PREV CH
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
l
*1
7, 6
PREV CH
RETURN
AUDIO*1
CLR
A (Red)*1
MENU
A (Red)
RETURN
f
l
f
m
A (Red)*1
B (Green)
C (Yellow)*1
D (Blue)*1
B (Green)
C (Yellow)
D (Blue)
RETURN
AUDIO
f
m
n
B (Green)*1
C (Yellow)*1
D (Blue)*1
AUDIO*1
CLR
n
o
CLR
o
Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: 1 to 9, 0
g
g
Number: +10*1
Number: +10
■ VCR/PVR operation
■ CD player/CD recorder/MD recorder operation
Available buttons
TOP MENU
Available buttons
Available buttons
b
h 8SOURCE
Number: 1 to 9, 0
GUIDE
DISPLAY
MUTING
CH +/–
b
h 8SOURCE
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
g
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i
j
k
DISPLAY
SETUP
Number: +10
SETUP
c q/w/e/r, ENTER
i
d
d
SETUP
MUTING
CH +/–
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
h 8SOURCE
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
d
j
k
l
m
o
7, 6
7, 6
DISC +/–
MENU
DISPLAY
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,
i
7, 6
A (Red)
PREV CH
RETURN
CLR
SEARCH
MUTING
f
l
m
n
o
f
j
REPEAT
RANDOM
MODE
DISC +/–
RETURN
AUDIO*1
CLR
Number: 1 to 9, 0
B (Green)
g
k
Number: +10
CLR
C (Yellow)
o
■ Cassette tape deck operation
Number: 1 to 9, 0
Number: +10*1
g
Note
e 1, t(Reverse
Playback), 2, 5, 4,
7, 6
h 8SOURCE
• With some components, certain buttons may not work as
expected, and some may not work at all.
• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of
iPod/iPhone (➔ page 81).
MUTING
j
*1
The pfunction is not supported. The p
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control
function of the HDMI standard.
En-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
Direct Change
The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are
different depending on the region.
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock
components, see the Onkyo web site at:
http://www.onkyo.com
Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update
your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available
from the Apple web site.
For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the
instruction manual of the Onkyo Dock.
Using the Onkyo Dock
RI Dock
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to
another input source, the AV receiver will
automatically switch to the input to which the RI Dock
is connected.
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of
your iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and
videos of your iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the
on-screen display (OSD) allows you to view,
navigate, and select your iPod/iPhone model’s
contents on your TV, and with the supplied remote
controller, you can control your iPod/iPhone from the
comfort of your sofa. You can even use the AV
receiver’s remote controller to operate your
iPod/iPhone.
Other Remote Operations
You can use the remote controller that came with the
AV receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions.
The available functionality depends on the AV
receiver.
Note
• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,
iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.
• The System On function may not work depending on the RI
Dock.
Note
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the
AV receiver’s remote controller for the first time
(➔ page 77).
iPod Alarm
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified
time and select your iPod as the input source
automatically.
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an ucable
(➔ page 20).
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
Note
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”
(➔ page 50).
• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,
some of the linked operations may not be available.
• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being
played or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in
sound (Beep).
■ System Function
System On
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when
RI Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can
be turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.
• This linked operation won’t work with models on which
music files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.
■ Operating Notes
• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback
volume.
• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its
volume control has no effect.
• If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone
while it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that it’s not set
too loud before you reconnect your headphones.
Auto Power On
If you press the remote controller’s 1(Playback)
while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver
will automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as
the input source, and your iPod/iPhone will start
playback.
En-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Other Components
■ uDock operation
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone
Press the appropriate REMOTE
MODE button first.
Available buttons
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been
programmed with the remote control code for your
Dock, you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock
with the buttons described further in this section.
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on
entering a remote control code (➔ page 76).
See the Dock’s instruction manual for more
information.
TOP MENU*1
a
e 8SOURCE*2
DISPLAY*3
b q/w/e/r, ENTER
f
MUTING
PLAYLIST e/r
g
e
f
ALBUM +/–
h
i VOL q/w
REPEAT
MENU
MODE*4
d
j
k
RANDOM
g
h
• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,
certain buttons may not work as expected.
• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the
instruction manual of the RI Dock.
RI Dock
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or
“HDD/DOCK”.
i
*1
TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with
• 8SOURCE may not work with a remote control
code (without u). In this case, make an u
connection and enter the remote control code 81993
(with u).
the DS-A2 RI Dock.
This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X
a
b
j
*2
RI Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not
respond the first time you press this button, in which case
you should press it again. This is because the remote
controller transmits the On and Standby commands
alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is already on, it will
remain on when the remote controller transmits the On
command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is already off, it
will remain off when the remote controller transmits the
Off command.
■ With the RI Control
Make an uconnection and enter the remote control
code 81993 (with u).
c
d
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”
(➔ page 50).
k
*3
DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.
Resume mode
■ Without the RI Control
*4
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first
(➔ page 77).
With the Resume function, you can resume playback of
the song that was playing when you removed your
iPod/iPhone from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.
En-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
seconds). Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER
again.
The on-screen information appears only on a TV that
is connected to HDMI outputs.
Audio
Troubleshooting
■ There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet
Make sure that the digital input source is selected properly.
(➔ page 59)
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.
Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way (➔ page 15).
Power
Resetting the AV receiver
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components
■ Can’t turn on the AV receiver
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the
wall outlet.
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press
8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV
receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter
standby mode.
Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct,
and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of
each speaker terminal. (➔ page 13)
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five
seconds or more, then plug it in again.
Make sure that the input source is properly selected.
(➔ page 29)
■ The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly
The AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode
when Auto Standby has been set and launches.
(➔ page 71)
Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.
(➔ page 14)
Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for home
theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, allowing
precise adjustment.
■ The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the
power, it turns off again
If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV receiver’s
display, press the remote controller’s MUTING button to
unmute the AV receiver. (➔ page 50)
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make sure
that all speaker cables and input sources are properly
connected, and leave the AV receiver with its power cord
disconnected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power
cord and turn the power on. If the AV receiver turns off
again, avoid resetting it and unplug the power cord. Then
contact your Onkyo dealer. (➔ page 14)
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your
radio presets and custom settings.
While a pair of headphones is connected to the PHONES
jack, no sound is output from the speakers. (➔ page 20)
If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings, and be
sure to select a supported audio format.
Remote indicator
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
device. On some game consoles, such as those that
support DVD, the default setting is off.
Caution:
• If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV receiver’s
display, the speaker cables may be shorting.
RECEIVER
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must connect
an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.
WARNING:
• If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet
immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.
Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,
twisted, or damaged.
HOME
Not all listening modes use all speakers. (➔ page 41)
Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individual
speaker levels. (➔ pages 60, 61)
To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down
HOME until the remote indicator lights (about 3
Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not still
connected.
En-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ The front high and surround back speakers
produce no sound
Depending on the current listening mode, no sound may be
produced by the front high and surround back speakers.
Select another listening mode. (➔ page 41)
If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. Set it to
“Off”. (➔ page 68)
If the volume level of each individual speaker has been
adjusted to high positive values, then the maximum master
volume possible may be reduced. Note that the individual
speaker volume levels are set automatically after the
Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup
has been performed. (➔ pages 24, 61)
■ Only the front speakers produce sound
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, only
the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.
(➔ page 43)
Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the
front high and surround back speakers may be weak.
■ Noise can be heard
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left /
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 59)
Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords,
performance, so refrain from doing it.
When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room
is reduced to 5.1channels and the front high and surround
back speakers produce no sound.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 59)
An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try
repositioning your cables.
■ Only the center speaker produces sound
When you play source material that contains no information
in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.
■ The Late Night function doesn’t work
Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby
If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listening mode with
a mono source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV
program, the sound is concentrated in the center speaker.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 59)
Make sure that the “TrueHD Loudness Management”
setting is not set to “Off”. The Late Night function doesn’t
work when this setting is disabled. (➔ page 63)
In the Mono listening mode, only the center speaker output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Center”.
(➔ page 62)
■ There’s no sound with a certain signal format
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected
device. On some game consoles, such as those that
support DVD, the default setting is off.
■ About DTS signals
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 59)
When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream
stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and
the dts indicator remains on. This is to prevent noise when
you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on
your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM,
you may not hear any sound because the AV receiver does
not switch formats immediately. In such case, you should
stop your player for about three seconds and then resume
playback.
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio
output format from a menu.
■ The surround speakers produce no sound
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or Mono
listening mode is selected, the surround speakers produce
no sound.
Depending on the input signal, some listening modes
cannot be selected. (➔ pages 41 to 48)
Depending on the source and current listening mode, not
much sound may be produced by the surround speakers.
Try selecting another listening mode. (➔ page 41)
■ Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode
(European, Australian and Asian models) The Pure
on.
With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to
playback DTS material properly even though your player is
connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response
changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recognize it as a
genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
(➔ page 59)
■ Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback
■ The center speaker produces no sound
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, the
center speaker produces no sound.
If no surround back speakers and front high speakers are
connected, or the Zone 2 speakers are being used, 6.1/7.1
playback is not possible.
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers output
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left /
Right”. (➔ page 62)
Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is not
always possible to select all of the listening modes.
(➔ pages 41 to 48)
Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may
produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.
Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.
(➔ page 69)
En-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN
can’t be heard
■ There’s no picture from a source connected to
an HDMI IN
Remote Controller
Since it takes longer to identify the format of an HDMI
signal than it does for other digital audio signals, audio
output may not start immediately.
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is not
guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC are not
guaranteed. (➔ page 93)
■ The remote controller doesn’t work
Before operating this unit, be sure to press RECEIVER.
Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct
polarity. (➔ page 11)
When the resolution is set to any resolution not supported
by the TV, no video is output from the HDMI outputs.
(➔ page 57)
■ There’s no sound during Whole House Mode
Make sure you’ve selected an analog audio input.
Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of batteries,
or old and new batteries. (➔ page 11)
If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV
support the current video resolution and you need to select
another resolution on your DVD player.
Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away
from the AV receiver, and that there’s no obstruction
between the remote controller and the AV receiver’s
remote control sensor. (➔ page 11)
Video
■ There’s no picture
Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all
the way. (➔ page 18)
■ The on-screen menus don’t appear
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV
receiver is connected is selected.
Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to direct
sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Relocate if
necessary.
Make sure that each video component is properly
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work
reliably when the doors are closed.
When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via HDMI
OUT MAIN, on-screen menus are not displayed.
If your TV is connected to the HDMI output(s), select
“- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setting to watch composite
video, and component video sources. (➔ page 58)
■ The on-screen information does not appear
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller
mode. (➔ pages 11, 78)
If the video source is connected to a component video
your TV must be connected to either the HDMI output(s) or
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. (➔ pages 15, 58)
Depending on the input signal, the on-screen information
may not appear when the input signal from HDMI IN is
output to a device connected to the HDMI output.
When using the remote controller to control other
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may not
work as expected.
If the video source is connected to a composite video input,
your TV must be connected to the HDMI output(s) or the
corresponding composite video output. (➔ page 15)
Tuner
Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control code.
(➔ page 76)
■ Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,
or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light
Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver and
remote controller. (➔ page 73)
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input, you
must assign that input to an input selector, and your TV
must be connected to the HDMI output(s). (➔ pages 15,
58)
■ Can’t control other components
Listen to the station in mono. (➔ page 38)
If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the ucable
and analog audio cable are connected properly.
Connecting only an ucable won’t be enough.
(➔ page 20)
(European, Australian and Asian models) While the
Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the analog video
circuitry is turned off and only video signals input through
HDMI IN can be output. (➔ page 41)
When listening to an AM station, operating the remote
controller may cause noise.
Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.
Concrete walls weaken radio signals.
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV
receiver is connected is selected.
mode. (➔ pages 11, 78)
If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor
antenna.
If you’ve connected an cassette tape deck to the TV/CD IN
jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or GAME IN jacks, for
the remote controller to work properly, you must set the
input display appropriately. (➔ page 50)
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, the “HDMI
Through” setting is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN
jack. (➔ pages 57, 70)
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the
appropriate remote control code. (➔ page 76)
To control another manufacturer’s component, point the
remote controller at that component. (➔ page 76)
En-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start playback by
pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play button. Remote
operation should then be possible.
Place the AV receiver away from the devices emitting
To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via u,
point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be sure to
enter the appropriate remote control code first.
(➔ page 77)
electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave
ovens, game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the
problem, stop using other devices which emit
electromagnetic waves.
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected via
u, point the remote controller at the component. Be sure
to enter the appropriate remote control code first.
(➔ page 77)
Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may not
work as expected.
When other wireless LAN devices are used near the AV
receiver, several issues such as interrupted playback and
communication may occur. You can avoid these issues by
changing the channel of your Wi-Fi router. For instructions
on changing channels, see the instruction manual provided
with your Wi-Fi router.
■ The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my
iPod/iPhone as the input source
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting a
Change function may select your iPod/iPhone as the input
source by mistake during the transition between tracks.
The entered remote control code may not be correct. If
more than one code is listed, try each one.
If there is a metallic object near the AV receiver, wireless
LAN connection may not be possible as the metal can
effect on the radio wave.
RI Dock for iPod/iPhone
■ iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone.
■ There’s no sound
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing.
If there is more than one access point in the network,
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the
Dock.
It is recommended to place the Wi-Fi router (access point)
and the AV receiver in the same room.
Zone 2/3
Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct input
source is selected, and the volume is turned up.
■ There’s no sound
Audio can be output only when analog, NET or USB input
source is selected in Zone 2/3.
Bluetooth
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.
■ Music playback is unavailable on the AV
receiver even after successful Bluetooth
connection.
Depending on the characteristics or specifications of your
Bluetooth-enabled device, playback on the AV receiver is
not guaranteed.
■ The Zone 2 speakers produce no sound
Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type
(Front)” is set to “Bi-Amp”. (➔ page 59)
■ There’s no video
Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT setting
is set to On.
Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or the
AV receiver.
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Network
■ The audio quality is poor after connection with a
Bluetooth-enabled device.
The Bluetooth reception is poor. Move the Bluetooth-
enabled device closer to the AV receiver or remove any
obstacle between the Bluetooth-enabled device and the AV
receiver.
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output video.
■ Cannot access to Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) network
or Sound playback is interrupted and
communication doesn’t work
The setting of SSID and encryption (WEP, etc.) is not
correct. Make the same settings for network and the AV
receiver.
■ The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t
control my iPod/iPhone
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the
Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not connect
properly to the Dock. Always remove your iPod/iPhone
from the case before inserting it into the Dock.
■ Cannot connect with the AV receiver.
The Bluetooth-enabled device does not support the profiles
required for the AV receiver.
Cannot receive radio wave due to a bad connection.
Shorten the distance from wireless LAN access point or
remove obstacles for a good visibility, and try again. Place
the AV receiver away from microwave ovens or other
access points.
The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s displaying
the Apple logo.
The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth-enabled device is
not enabled. Refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth-
enabled device for how to enable the function.
Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.
(➔ page 81)
2.4 GHz band for wireless LAN may not be enough.
Connect the ETHERNET port and router with the Ethernet
cable after selecting “Wired” in “Network Connection”
setting in “Network”. (➔ pages 16, 72)
When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller, point it
toward your AV receiver.
En-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ Bluetooth connection cannot be built
■ Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web
■ The sound changes when I connect my
browser
headphones
When building a Bluetooth connection between the AV
receiver and your Bluetooth-enabled device for the first
time, if the connection is fail, you need to power off your
Bluetooth-enabled device and power on again to clear the
device name, and build the connection again.
If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always allocate
the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if you find that
you can’t connect to a server or Internet radio station,
screen. (➔ page 72)
When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian and
Asian models).
If there is metallic object near the AV receiver, Bluetooth
connection may not be possible as the metal can effect on
the radio wave.
■ The speaker distance cannot be set as required
The values entered may be automatically adjusted with
values best-suited for your home theater.
Check the “Network” settings. (➔ page 72)
If the wireless LAN and Bluetooth connections are used at
the same time, try to connect the ETHERNET port and
router with the Ethernet cable after selecting “Wired” in
“Network Connection” setting in “Network” for a better
connection. (➔ pages 16, 72)
USB Device Playback
■ The display doesn’t work
The display is turned off when the Pure Audio (European,
Australian and Asian models) listening mode is selected.
■ Can’t access the music files on a USB device
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.
The AV receiver supports USB devices that support the
USB mass storage device class. However, playback may
conform to the USB mass storage device class.
(➔ page 94)
■ How do I change the language of a multiplex
source
Use the “Multiplex” setting in the “Audio Adjust” menu to
select “Main” or “Sub”. (➔ page 62)
Music Server and Internet Radio
Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
Depending on the type of format, the playback from a USB
device may not be performed normally. Check the type of
the file formats that is supported. (➔ page 95)
■ The ufunctions don’t work
To use u, you must make an uconnection and an
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component
and AV receiver, even if they are connected digitally.
(➔ page 20)
Check the network connection between the AV receiver
and your router or switch. (➔ page 16)
USB memory devices with security functions cannot be
played.
Make sure that your modem and router are properly
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.
While Zone 2/3 is selected, the ufunctions don’t work.
(➔ page 20)
Others
Make sure the server is up and running and compatible
with the AV receiver. (➔ page 94)
■ The functions System On/Auto Power On and
Direct Change don’t work for components
connected via u
■ Standby power consumption
Check the “Network”settings. (➔ page 72)
In the following cases, the power consumption in standby
mode may reach up to a maximum of 8.6 W:
–The “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”.
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter
–The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than “Off”.
–The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.
■ Playback stops while listening to music files on
the server
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV receiver.
(➔ page 94)
These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned on.
(➔ page 20)
■ When performing “Automatic Speaker Setup”,
the measurement fails and the message
“Ambient noise is too high.” is displayed.
If you download or copy large files on your computer,
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a
dedicated server.
This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker unit.
Check if the unit produces normal sounds.
If an MHL-enabled mobile device connected to the AUX
(front) input is charged, the power consumption in standby
mode will increase than the figure above. (➔ page 16)
If the server is serving large music files to several
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.
Reduce the number of playback devices on the network,
upgrade your network, or use a switch instead of a hub.
■ The following settings can be made for the
composite video inputs
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these
settings.
En-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
• We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any
error or damage of network environment or access
device resulting from the use of this apparatus.
Confirm with the provider or access device maker
for more information.
On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the
input source that you want to set and the HOME
button simultaneously. While holding down the
input selector button, press HOME until “Video
ATT :On” appears on the AV receiver’s display.
Then, release both buttons. To turn the setting off,
repeat the above process so that “Video ATT :Off”
appears on the AV receiver’s display, and release
the buttons.
• Video Attenuation
This setting can be made for the BD/DVD,
CBL/SAT, STB/DVR or GAME input.
If you have a game console connected to the
composite video input, and the picture isn’t very
clear, you can attenuate the gain.
Radio Wave Caution
The AV receiver uses a 2.4 GHz radio wave
frequency, which is a band used by other wireless
systems as 1 and 2 described below.
1. Devices which use a 2.4 GHz radio wave
frequency
Scope of Operation
• Cordless phones
• Cordless facsimiles
• Microwave ovens
• Wireless LAN devices (IEEE802.11b/g/n)
• Wireless AV equipment
• Wireless controllers for game systems
• Microwave oven-based health aids
• Video transmitter
• Specific type of external monitor and LCD
display
Use of the AV receiver is limited to home use.
(Transmission distances may be reduced depending
on communication environment.)
In the following locations, poor condition or
inability to receive radio waves may cause the
audio to be interrupted or stopped:
iron framed buildings.
• Near large metallic furniture.
• In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle.
• In a location exposed to the magnetic field, static
electricity or radio wave interference from radio
communication equipment using the same
frequency band (2.4 GHz) as the AV receiver, such
as a 2.4 GHz wireless LAN device
Video ATT :Off: (default).
Video ATT :On: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.
■ If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to
the HDMI output(s) is unstable, try switching the
DeepColor function off
2. Less common devices which use a 2.4 GHz
radio wave frequency
• Anti-theft systems
• Amateur radio stations (HAM)
• Warehouse logistic management systems
• Discrimination systems for train or emergency
vehicles
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously
press the STB/DVR and 8ON/STANDBY buttons
on the AV receiver. While holding down STB/DVR,
press 8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off”
appears on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release
both buttons. To reactivate the DeepColor function,
repeat the above process until “Deep Color:On”
appears on the AV receiver’s display and release
the buttons.
(IEEE802.11b/g/n) or microwave oven.
• If you live in a heavily populated residential area
(apartment, townhouse, etc.) and if your neighbor’s
microwave oven is placed near your AV receiver,
you may experience radio wave interference. If this
occurs, move your AV receiver to a different place.
When the microwave oven is not in use, there will be
no radio wave interference.
If these devices and the AV receiver are used at the
same time, the audio may be undesirably stopped or
disturbed due to a radio wave interference.
Suggestions for improvement
• Switch off the devices which emit the radio
wave.
• Place the interfering devices away from the AV
receiver.
• The AV receiver uses radio wave, and a third
person can receive the wave on purpose or
accidentally. Do not use the communication for
important or fatal matters.
En-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ Electronic device which requires cautions
Hearing aid, pace maker, other medical electronic
devices, fire alarm, automatic door, and other
automatic control device.
When using a pace maker or other medical electronic
devices, confirm with the medical electronic device
maker or dealer for the effect of the radio wave.
Radio Wave Reflections
The radio waves received by the AV receiver include
the radio wave coming directly from the devices and
waves coming from various directions due to
reflections by walls, furniture and building (reflected
waves). The reflected waves (due to obstacles and
reflecting objects) further produce a variety of
reflected waves as well as variation in reception
condition depending on locations. If the audio cannot
be received properly due to this phenomenon, try
moving the location of the wireless LAN device a little.
Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the
reflected waves when a person crosses or
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for
signal processing and control functions. In very rare
situations, severe interference, noise from an
external source, or static electricity may cause it to
lockup. In the unlikely event that this happens,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait at
least five seconds, and then plug it back in.
approaches the space between the AV receiver and
the wireless LAN device.
• We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any
damages resulting from the use of this apparatus
except in the cases deemed acceptable under the
applicable laws and regulations.
• Operation in all environment is not guaranteed for
wireless LAN. The communication may not be
possible or have desirable communication speed.
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused
by the unit’s malfunction. Before you record
important data, make sure that the material will be
recorded correctly.
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.
Precautions
• Do not use this apparatus near an electronic device
handling high-accuracy controls or weak signals.
Doing so may cause an accident due to a
malfunction of the device.
• Do not use this apparatus in use prohibited location
such as an aircraft equipment or a hospital. Doing
so may cause an accident due to a malfunction of
an electronic device or an electro-medical
apparatus. Follow the instructions of the medical
facilities.
En-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
DISCLAIMER
Video Resolution Chart
control of any company which has designed, manufactured or distributed/have distributed this
device, and its affiliates (collectively, “Company”). We have no control over the nature, content
and availability of those services. The inclusion of any links does not necessarily imply a
All information, content and services available through this device belong to third parties and
are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws of
applicable countries. The information, content and services provided through this device are
for your personal, noncommercial use only. Any information, content or services may not be
used in any manner other than previously approved by the appropriate content owner or
service provider.
You may not modify, copy, republish, translate, exploit, create derivative works, upload, post,
transmit, sell or distribute in any manner any information, content or services available
through this device, unless expressly permitted by the appropriate copyright, patent,
trademark and/or other intellectual property owner, including, without limitation, content owner
or service provider.
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by
the AV receiver.
✔: Output available
HDMI
4K*1
Output
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
Input
HDMI
*3
4K*2
✔
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
✔
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
✔
720p
✔
✔
✔
*3
✔
480p/576p
480i/576i
1080p
✔
✔
*3
✔
✔
Component
Composite
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
480i/576i
*3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*3
✔
THE CONTENT AND SERVICES AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE ARE PROVIDED
“AS IS”. COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT INFORMATION, CONTENT OR SERVICES SO
PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE.
COMPANY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Component
1080p
Composite
480i/576i
Output
s
1080i
720p
480p/576p
480i/576i
Input
HDMI
4K*2
1080p/24
1080p
1080i
720p
Company makes no representation or warranty of any kind, express or implied, about the
completeness, accuracy, validity, legality, reliability, suitability or availability with respect to
the information, content or services available through this device. Company shall not be liable,
whether in contract or tort, including negligence and strict liability, for any direct, indirect,
special, incidental or consequential damages or any other damages arising out of, or in
connection with, any information contained in, or as a result of the use of any content or
service by you or any third party, even if Company has been advised of the possibility of such
damages, nor shall Company be liable for any third party claims against users of this device
or any third party.
In no event shall Company be responsible nor liable for, without limiting the generality of the
foregoing, any interruption or suspension of any information, content or service available
through this device. Company is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to
the information, content and services available through this device.
480p/576p
480i/576i
1080p
Component
Composite
✔
1080i
✔
720p
✔
480p/576p
480i/576i
480i/576i
✔
✔
✔
*1
*2
Supported resolutions: [3840 × 2160 30 Hz], [3840 × 2160 25 Hz], [3840 × 2160 24 Hz],
[4096 × 2160 24 Hz]
The AV receiver is compatible with HDMI IN 1 to HDMI IN 4. However, the number of the
player that outputs video signal at 4K resolution or the same level at the same time may
be up to three.
*3
Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB.
Any question or request for service relating to the information, content or services should be
made directly to the appropriate content owners and services providers.
En-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Before Starting
Limitation of liability
The program and accompanying online
Firmware Update
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 69).
• Turn off the controller device connected via network.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB
or servers, etc.
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can
choose from the following two methods: update via
network, or update via USB storage. Choose the one
that best suits your environment. Before proceeding
with the update, please read the corresponding
explanations carefully.
documentation are furnished to you for use at your
own risk. Onkyo will not be liable and you will have
no remedy for damages for any claim of any kind
whatsoever concerning your use of the program or
the accompanying online documentation,
regardless of legal theory, and whether arising in
tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be liable to
you or any third party for any special, indirect,
incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,
including, but not limited to, compensation,
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss
of present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for
any other reason whatsoever.
■ Update via network
You need a Internet connection to update the
firmware.
Update Procedure
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the
remote controller.
1
■ Update via USB storage (➔ page 91)
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a
USB flash memory stick. You need at least 32 MB
of available space to update the firmware.
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
2
Note that the “Firmware Update” option will be
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes
operable.
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.
Note
• Check the network connection before updating.
• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV
receiver during the update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is
being updated.
• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.
• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated
as an independent device.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver
may take a while to read it.
includes the ability to power them.
• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
damage of data resulting from the use of a USB device with
the AV receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your
important music files beforehand.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port,
Onkyo recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not
supported. Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.
• USB devices with security functions are not supported.
Updating the Firmware via Network
Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using
network connection.
3
Note that this option will not be available if there
is no firmware file newer than the currently
installed version. If the AV receiver is not
connected to the internet, “Update via NET” is
not displayed.
Note
• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and the
AV receiver is connected to the Internet.
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being
updated.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the
update process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.
• It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update
is finished.
Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
4
During the update process, the on-screen display
may disappear depending on the updated
program. When this occurs, you can still view the
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.
The on-screen display will reappear after the
update is complete, and upon turning the AV
receiver off and on again.
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update
has been completed.
5
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Case 2:
Troubleshooting
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
6
If an error occurs during the update process,
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try
again.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.
Case 1:
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the
following table and take appropriate action.
controller.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.
Case 3:
If you do not have an Internet connection to the
network, please contact Onkyo Support.
■ Errors during an update via network
Congratulations! You now have the latest
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.
Error Code
Description
Updating the Firmware via USB
*-01, *-10
The Ethernet cable was not detected.
Reconnect the cable properly.
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware
using a USB device.
*-02, *-03,
*-04, *-05,
*-06, *-11,
*-13, *-14,
*-16, *-17,
*-18, *-20,
*-21
Internet connection error.
Check the following items:
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,
gateway address, and DNS server are
configured properly.
• Make sure the router is turned on.
• Make sure the AV receiver and the router
are connected with an Ethernet cable.
• Make sure your router is configured
properly. See the instruction manual of
the router.
Note
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update
process.
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device
during the update process.
• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the
firmware file or the AC power cord during the update
process.
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC
while it is being updated.
• If your network allows only one client
connection and there is any other device
already connected, the AV receiver will
not be able to access the network.
Consult your Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
• If your modem does not function as a
router, you will need a router. Depending
on your network, you may need to
configure the proxy server if necessary.
See the document provided by your ISP.
If you are still unable to access the
Internet, the DNS or proxy server may be
temporarily down. Contact your ISP.
• It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update
is finished.
Before Starting
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”
(➔ page 69).
• Turn off the controller device connected via network.
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB
or servers, etc.
Others
Retry the update procedure from the
beginning. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Update Procedure
Troubleshooting
Case 1:
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the
following table and take appropriate action.
Select “Update” and press ENTER.
The update process will begin.
10
During the update process, the on-screen display
may disappear depending on the updated
program. When this occurs, you can still view the
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.
The on-screen display will reappear after the
update is complete, and upon turning the AV
receiver off and on again.
Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not
remove the USB device during the update
process.
Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is
any data in the USB device, remove it first.
1
Download the firmware file from the Onkyo
web site. The file name is as follows:
2
ONKAVR****_************.zip
Unzip the downloaded file. The numbers of
folders and files differ according to the model.
Error Code
Description
*-01, *-10
The USB device was not detected. Make
sure the USB flash memory or USB cable is
properly connected to the USB port. If the
USB storage device has its own power
supply, use it to power the USB device.
Copy all the extracted folders including all
folders and files to the root folder of the USB
device. Be careful not to copy the zip file.
3
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV
receiver’s display, indicating that the update
has been completed.
11
12
Remove the USB device from your PC and
connect it to the USB port on the AV receiver.
*-20, *-21
The firmware file was not found in the root
folder of the USB device, or the firmware
file is for another model. Retry and
download the file on the support page of
the web site, following the on-site
instructions. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
4
Remove the USB device.
Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned
on.
5
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up
the front display.
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote
controller.
Others
Retry the update procedure from the
beginning. If the error persists, please
contact Onkyo Support and provide the
error code.
The AV receiver will enter standby mode
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.
Select the USB input source.
6
“Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s
display and then the name of the USB device is
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize
the USB device.
Congratulations! You now have the latest
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.
Case 2:
If an error occurs during the update process,
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try
again.
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the
remote controller.
7
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.
8
Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.
9
Note that this option will not be available if there
is no firmware file newer than the currently
installed version. If the AV receiver is not
connected to the internet, “Update via USB” is
not displayed.
Operating
procedure
(➔ page 56)
En-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Supported Audio Formats
About Copyright Protection
About HDMI
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit)
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution
Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio)
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital
TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a
new digital interface standard for connecting TVs,
projectors, Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes,
and other video components. Until now, several
separate video and audio cables have been required
to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single
cable can carry control signals, digital video, and up
to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM,
multichannel digital audio, and multichannel PCM).
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is
*2
Digital Content Protection) , a copy-protection
system for digital video signals. Other devices
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also
support HDCP.
Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support
HDMI output of the above audio formats.
*1
DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface
standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The
*2
video encryption technology developed by Intel for
HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and
requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the
encrypted video.
*1
compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so
TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected
by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may
not work with some TVs and displays, resulting in no
picture.)
*3
DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,
Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and
Silicon Image, this open industry group’s objective is to
address the industry’s requirements for a digital
connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and
digital displays.
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
*2
Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible
components can display the picture.
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the
following:
Note
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital
Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable.
(Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need
to make a separate connection for audio.) However,
reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed.
In addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may
be restricted by the connected source component. If the
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component
connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the
Sync, 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough), DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multichannel
PCM.
connected component’s instruction manual for details.
En-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP or computer
dealer if you’re unsure.
The setting varies depending on the media server or
controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction
manual for details.
If the operating system of your personal computer is
Windows 8/Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is
already installed. For more information, see the
Microsoft web site.
Network/USB Features
Note
Network Requirements
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your
broadband Internet connection must be working and able to
access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have any problems
with your Internet connection.
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network
settings automatically. If you want to configure these
settings manually, see “Network” (➔ page 72).
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you
have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a
PPPoE-compatible router.
■ Ethernet Network
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet
network is recommended. Although it’s possible to
network wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it
is recommended to use wired connections.
USB Device Requirements
• USB mass storage device class (but not always
guaranteed).
■ Ethernet Router
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each
section will be treated as an independent device.
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are
not supported.
A router manages the network, data-routing and
supplying of IP addresses. Your router must support
the following:
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy
server to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured
to use a proxy server, use the same settings for the AV
receiver (➔ page 72).
several networked computers to access the Internet
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The
AV receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DHCP supplies IP addresses to the network
devices, allowing them to configure themselves
automatically.
Server Requirements
■ Server playback
Note
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on
a computer or media server and supports the
following technologies:
• Windows Media Player 11
• Windows Media Player 12
• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No
Storage” will be displayed.
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s
USB port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to
power it.
• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is
recommended.
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support
the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB
devices to be connected to computers without the need for
special drivers or software. Note that not all USB MP3
players support the USB Mass Storage Class standard.
Refer to your USB MP3 player’s instruction manual for
details.
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be
played.
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or
damage to data stored on a USB device when that device
is used with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back
up your important music files beforehand.
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some
Internet Service Providers (ISP) require you to use
specific routers. Please consult your ISP or computer
dealer if you’re unsure.
• DLNA-certified media server
• The computer or media server must be on the same
network as the AV receiver.
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.
■ CAT5 Ethernet cable
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to
connect the AV receiver to your home network.
Note
• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.
■ Internet Access (for Internet radio)
■ Remote playback
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet
connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide
satisfactory results, so a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL
• Windows Media Player 12
• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability
Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller
device.
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with
special music software are not supported.
En-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which
includes the ability to power them.
• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB
device must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB
port.
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver
make take a while to read it.
• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.
■ WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz are supported.
■ LPCM (Linear PCM)
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are
supported.
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
■ WAV (.wav or .WAV)
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and
192 kHz are supported.
*
Only for playback via network.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are
supported.
Supported Audio File Formats
For server playback and playback from a USB device,
the AV receiver supports the following music file
formats.
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,
playback times may not display correctly.
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
*
For playback from a USB device, sampling rates of
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit
176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are not supported.
■ AAC
(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/
.3GP or .3G2)
• The sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz is supported.
Note
• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the
following music file formats: FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, DSD and
Dolby TrueHD.
• In the case of server playback, the above-mentioned file
formats may not be played depending on the server type.
■ Dolby TrueHD (.vr/.mlp/.VR/.MLP)
• Sampling rates of 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of
between 8 kbps and 320 kbps are supported.
*
For playback from a USB device, sampling rates only of
48 kHz and 64 kHz are supported.
■ MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps
and 320 kbps. Incompatible files cannot be played.
■ FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data
compression.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and
192 kHz are supported.
About DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA
develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable
networks where digital content such as photos,
music, and videos can be shared through consumer
electronics, personal computers, and mobile devices
in and beyond the home. The AV receiver complies
with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1.5.
■ WMA (.wma or .WMA)
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an
audio compression technology developed by
Microsoft Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit
■ Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)
®
format by using Windows Media Player.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and
500 kbps are supported. Incompatible files cannot
be played.
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz, bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps,
and WMA DRM are supported.
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.
En-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the
Microsoft group of companies.
License and Trademark
Information
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its
affiliates.
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
THX Select2 Plus
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of
THX Ltd.
Before any home theater component can be THX Select2
Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and
performance tests. Only then can a product feature the
THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the
Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus
requirements define hundreds of parameters, including
power amplifier performance, and pre-amplifier
performance and operation for both digital and analog
domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers also feature
proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which
accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater
playback.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol,
& DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of
DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
“MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are
trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the
United States and other counties.”
Apple, iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Wi-Fi certified logo shows international association
certifying interoperability “Wi-Fi Alliance” ensures the
product has passed the test for compatibility with other
Wi-Fi certified equipment.
Music Optimizer™ and “WRAT” are trademarks of Onkyo
Corporation.
Manufactured under license from
Audyssey Laboratories™,Inc. U.S. and foreign patents
pending. Audyssey MultEQ®, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey DSX® are
registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories,Inc.
“The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States
and other countries.”
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Onkyo is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED® are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance.”
Onkyo does not guarantee Bluetooth compatibility between
the AV receiver and all Bluetooth-enabled devices.
For compatibility between the AV receiver and another
device with Bluetooth technology, consult the device’s
documentation and dealer. In some countries, there may
be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your
local authorities.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property
rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology
outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Microsoft.
InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
En-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Video Section
Frequency band
2.4 GHz band (2.4000 GHz -
2.4835 GHz)
FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum)
Specifications
Amplifier Section
Modulation method
Compatible Bluetooth profiles
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component Y)
0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Component PB/CB,
PR/CR)
A2DP 1.2 (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile)
AVRCP 1.3 (Audio Video Remote
Control Profile)
SBC
Rated Output Power
All channels:
1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Composite)
110 watts minimum continuous power
Component Video Frequency Response
5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB
per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels
driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a
maximum total harmonic distortion of
0.08% (FTC)
125 watts minimum continuous power
per channel, 6 ohm loads, 2 channels
driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)
(North American)
Supported Codecs
Transmission range (A2DP)
20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (Sampling frequency
44.1 kHz)
Tuner Section
FM Tuning Frequency Range
*1
The actual range will vary depending on factors such as
obstacles between devices, magnetic fields around a
microwave oven, static electricity, cordless phone,
reception sensitivity, antenna’s performance, operating
system, software application, etc.
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz (North American
and Taiwanese)
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS (Others)
7 ch × 170 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
driven of 1% (IEC)
(Others)
AM Tuning Frequency Range
522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz
Preset Channel
Maximum Effective Output Power
7 ch × 185 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch
40
General
driven (JEITA)
(Asian)
Network Section
Power Supply
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
(North American and Taiwanese)
AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (Others)
*
Dynamic Power
*
IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power
Ethernet LAN
Wireless LAN
Compatible standards:
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
250 W (3 Ω, Front)
220 W (4 Ω, Front)
130 W (8 Ω, Front)
Power Consumption 6.9 A (North American and Taiwanese)
690 W (Others)
No-sound Power Consumption
®
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n standard (Wi-Fi
standard)
WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit, WPA/WPA2-
PSK (AES), WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)
80 W (North American and Taiwanese)
0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 Ω)
Security:
75 W (230 V)
80 W (240 V)
(Others)
Damping Factor
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)
Transmission frequency
200 mV/47 kΩ (LINE)
Stand-by Power Consumption
1 - 11 ch (North American and
Taiwanese)
2.5 mV/47 kΩ (PHONO MM)
0.1 W (North American and Taiwanese)
0.2 W (Others)
Dimensions (W × H × D)
10 - 13 ch (France)
1 - 13 ch (Others)
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance
200 mV/2.2 kΩ (LINE OUT)
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance
2 V/2.2 kΩ (LINE OUT)
70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5% Direct)
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (Direct
mode)
®
(Wi-Fi standard)
435 mm × 175 mm × 380 mm
17-1/8" × 6-7/8" × 14-15/16"
Radio frequency
2.4 GHz
Weight
11.2 kg (24.7 lbs.)
Phono Overload
Bluetooth Section
Communication system
Tone Control Characteristics
Bluetooth Specification version 2.1 +
EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
Maximum communication range
10 dB, 30 Hz (BASS)
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)
Signal to Noise Ratio 106 dB (LINE, IHF-A)
80 dB (PHONO MM, IHF-A)
*1
Line of sight approx. 15 m
Speaker Impedance 4 Ω - 16 Ω
En-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
■ HDMI
Input
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, IN 7,
AUX INPUT
Output
Video Resolution
Audio Format
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB
4K
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,
DVD-Audio, DSD
Supported
3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,
x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC (RIHD), 4K (up-
scaling and Passthrough)
■ Video Inputs
Component
Composite
IN
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME
■ Video Outputs
Component
Composite
OUT
MONITOR OUT
■ Audio Inputs
Digital
Optical: 1
Coaxial: 2
Analog
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME,
PC, TV/CD, PHONO
■ Audio Outputs
Analog
Subwoofer Pre Outputs
ZONE2 LINE OUT, ZONE3 LINE OUT
2
Speaker Outputs
Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL/FHL,
SBR/FHR) + ZONE2 (L, R)
Phones
1 (ø 6.3)
■ Others
Setup Mic
RI
1
1
USB
Ethernet
1 (Front)
1
Specifications and features are subject to change
without notice.
En-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN
http://www.onkyo.com/
The Americas
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.
For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
For Product Support Team Only:
1-800-229-1687
http://www.us.onkyo.com/
Europe
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/
Unit 19, Building 6, Croxley Green Business Park, Hatters Lane, Watford, WD18 8YH, UK
Tel: +44 (0)8712-00-19-96 Fax: +44 (0)8712-00-19-95
China
(Hong Kong)
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039
http://www.hk.onkyo.com/
(Mainland)
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJing Road, Jing’an District, Shanghai, China 200041,
Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo SUPPORT site.
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/
The above-mentioned information is subject to change without prior notice.
Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest update.
Y1303-3
SN 29401427EN-B
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 2 7 E N - B *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Using Multiple Accounts
®
Using Internet Radio
Pandora internet radio
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,
which means you can freely switch between several
logins. After registering user accounts, login is
performed from the “Users” screen.
–Getting Started (U.S. only)..................... 2
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3
Note
Press MENU while the Users screen is
displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
(North American only)..............................4
You can either store a new user account, or
delete an existing one.
Press NET.
1
Using Slacker Personal Radio...................... 6
Using MP3tunes............................................. 7
A list of the network services appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver.
Tip
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.
2
En-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Delete this station:
Pandora® internet radio
–Getting Started (U.S. only)
To play a station, use q/wto select the station
from your station list, and then press ENTER.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
2
This will permanently delete a station from your
Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback
will be lost should you choose to re-create the
station with the same track or artist.
Create station from this track:
Creates a radio station from this track.
Rename this station:
Lets you rename the current radio station.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for
your profile on www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track:
Pandora will bookmark the current track and
allow you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes
in one step!
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service
that plays the music you know and helps you discover
music you’ll love.
Create a New Station:
Enter the name of a track, artist, or genre and
Pandora will create a unique radio station for you
based on the musical qualities of that track, artist,
or genre.
Use q/wto select “I have a Pandora Account”
1
or “I’m new to Pandora” and then press
ENTER.
■ Menu Items
I like this track:
Give a track “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play
more music like it.
I don’t like this track:
Give a track “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban
that track from the current station.
Why is this track playing?:
Discover some of the musical attributes that
Pandora uses to create your personal radio
stations.
If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to
Pandora”. You will see an activation code on
your TV screen. Please write down this code. Go
to an Internet connected computer and point your
browser to www.pandora.com/onkyo
Enter your activation code and then follow the
instructions to create your Pandora account and
your personalized Pandora Internet radio
stations. You can create your stations by entering
your favorite tracks and artists when prompted.
After you have created your account and stations
you can return to your Onkyo receiver and press
enter to begin listening to your personalized
Pandora Internet radio.
I’m tired of this track:
PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora
trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks
of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission.
sleep and Pandora will not play it for one month.
Create station from this artist:
Creates a radio station from this artist.
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can
add your Pandora account to your Onkyo
receiver by selecting “I have a Pandora
Account” and logging in with your email and
password.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
En-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Use q/wto select the menu, then press
ENTER.
Use q/wto select a channel, and press ENTER
or 1to start playback.
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)
2
3
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”
Search:
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
1
and then press ENTER.
You can search for music by Artist, Album, or
Track.
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you
don’t have one yet, you can create a new
account at
Music Guide:
You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists,
Top Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and
Staff Picks.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select
“Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.
Enter your user name (usually your email) and
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web
Setup.
Note
Rhapsody Channels:
• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t
work.
Listen to radio channels programmed by
Rhapsody’s top-notch editors.
Playlists:
■ Menu Items
Add track to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing tracks.
Add album to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing albums.
Add playlist to My Library:
Bookmark currently-playing playlists.
Add channel to My Channels:
Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio
channels.
Play your own personal playlists.
My Library:
Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from
the Rhapsody catalog using My Library.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Sign out from your Rhapsody account.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
4. Press ENTER.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites
list.
Tip
• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and
Rhapsody Channels from My Library.
En-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Use q/wto select “Sign In”, and then press
ENTER.
Use q/wto select the desired channel and then
press ENTER.
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio
(North American only)
1
3
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can
sign in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user
name and password in the next keyboard screen,
or in Web Setup. If you don’t know your
username or password, call Sirius XM at (888)
539-7474 for assistance.
The playback screen for the selected channel
appears and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet
Radio.
Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of
SiriusXM Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen
shows how many days are left in your trial. After the
trial period expires, if you want to continue listening to
the service, you must subscribe. To subscribe go to
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your
computer.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6
Tip
■ Menu Items
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.
When you subscribe, you will be provided with a
username and password which has to be entered into
the AV receiver.
■ Using the keyboard screen
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user
name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
AV receiver connected to the Internet. Using the
remote control, follow these steps:
SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold
separately and are governed by the Sirius Terms and
Conditions (see www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this
agreement before you purchase your subscription.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM
Internet Radio” screen appears which displays
the category available for selection.
Use q/wto select the category and then press
2
ENTER.
The channel list screen for the selected category
appears.
En-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Profile:
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,
and then press ENTER.
Using Last.fm Internet Radio
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you
love...
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in
the next keyboard screen.
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and
see what they like, too.
It signs out from your account.
■ Using the keyboard screen
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your
user name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
or 1 to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at
www.last.fm/join
■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm
Internet Radio” screen appears.
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Tip
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without
a computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that
adapt as your tastes change.
Artist Radio:
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of
music inspired by your choice.
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Use q/wto select menu and then press
ENTER.
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
2
■ Using scrobbling control
Search Station:
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User
Name.
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Top Artists Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
• You can play tracks from personalized station
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and
“Your Recommendations”).
My Library:
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
Start your free trial straight away when you create
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest
prices and full information are available at
www.last.fm/subscribe
En-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
You can control the tracks with the buttons on
the remote control.
Using Slacker Personal Radio
6
If you do not have an account, create one on
the Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with
your computer.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6
Stores information to server, making it more likely
that the song will be played again.
Ban Song:
Stores information to server, making it less likely
that the song will be played again.
Ban Artist:
Stores information to server, making it less likely
that the songs from this artist will be played
again.
Mark Favorite:
Adds the currently playing station to your
favorites.
Unmark Favorite:
Deletes the currently playing station from your
favorites.
1
■ Menu Items
Rate Song as Favorite:
If you already have a Slacker account, select
“Sign in to your account” and then press
ENTER.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
information from the remote control or the keys
on the main unit.
If there are no mistakes in the information you
have entered, use q/w/e/rto select “OK”
then press ENTER.
2
3
An account information confirmation screen
appears.
If you do not have an account, select “Access
without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a
restricted version of the service.
Note that use will be restricted.
Add song to Library:
Tip
Adds the currently playing track to your library.
Delete song from Library:
Deletes the currently playing track from your
library.
Add to My Favorites:
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
4
5
ENTER.
To sign out, use q/wto select “Sign out” from
this screen and then press ENTER.
Use q/wto select a station and then press
ENTER or 1to start playback from the
station.
The playback screen appears.
En-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Playing Contents on the AV Receiver
The track at the top of the music list is automatically
played back.
Using MP3tunes
Tip
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer
plus safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:
Use q/wto select a track and press ENTER or
5
• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes
service as described in “Common Procedures in Internet
Radio Menu” (➔ page 1).
1to start playback.
A playback screen appears.
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the
remote control.
Creating an Account on your Computer
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,
1
and then press ENTER.
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6
From your computer, open a web browser and
go to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup
1
Enter the e-mail address and password you
used when creating your account, select “OK”
and press ENTER.
■ Menu Items
2
Go to Menu:
Create an account.
2
3
Displays additional menu options.
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter
your user name and password from the remote
controller or the buttons on the AV receiver.
Click the Upload link
(www.mp3tunes.com/upload) to add files to
your Locker.
You can view or change your MP3tunes
account settings by going to
www.mp3tunes.com/account.
If there are no mistakes in the information you
3
View, edit and listen to your files by clicking
on Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).
4
have entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.
An account information confirmation screen
appears.
Tip
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Use q/wto select the menu, then press
4
ENTER.
Music:
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and
Playlists.
Shuffle:
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from
your Locker.
Search:
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.
Account Info:
Your MP3tunes account information.
Sign Out:
Log out of your MP3tunes account.
En-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisation de plusieurs comptes
®
Pandora internet Radio
Utilisation d’une
webradio
L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir
enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
–Pour commencer
(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2
Utilisation de Rhapsody
Procédures courantes dans le menu de
webradio
(Etats-Unis uniquement).......................... 3
Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est
affiché.
1
Remarque
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4
Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :
Add new user :
• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la
région.
• Certain services réseau ou contenus disponible via cet
appareil peuvent être inaccessibles au cas où le prestataire
de services terminerait son service.
Remove this user :
Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................5
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6
Appuyez sur NET.
1
Conseil
Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le
témoin NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le
câble Ethernet est fermement branché sur
l’ampli-tuner AV.
• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de
plusieurs comptes utilisateur.
• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.
• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord
vous déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez
depuis l’écran « Users ».
Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur
ENTER.
2
La page principale du service sélectionné
s’affiche.
Fr-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Delete this station :
Pandora® internet Radio
–Pour commencer (États-Unis
uniquement)
Pour lire une station, utilisez q/wpour
sélectionner la station dans votre liste de
stations, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
2
Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station
de votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous
décideriez de récréer la station avec les mêmes
pistes ou les mêmes artistes, tous vos
acceptations/rejets précédents seront perdus.
Create station from this track :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de
cette piste.
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Create a New Station :
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et
personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que
vous connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous
aimez.
Saisissez le nom d’une piste, d’un artiste ou d’un
genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique
pour vous en fonction des qualités musicales de
la piste, de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.
Rename this station :
Vous permet de renommer la station radio
actuelle.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « I have a
1
■ Eléments du menu
I like this track :
Acceptez la piste et Pandora lira d’autres
musiques similaires.
I don’t like this track :
Rejetez la piste et Pandora éliminera cette piste
de la station écoutée.
Why is this track playing? :
Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que
Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio
personnelles.
Pandora Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora »,
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez
« I’m new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation
apparaîtra sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez
ce code. Utilisez un ordinateur branché sur
Internet et connectez le navigateur à
Bookmark this artist :
Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour
votre profil sur www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track :
Pandora marquera la piste en cours et vous
permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou
iTunes en une étape !
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My
Favorites.
www.pandora.com/onkyo
Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les
instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et
vos stations webradio Pandora personnalisées.
Lorsque vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer
vos stations en saisissant vos pistes et vos
artistes préférés. Après la création de votre
compte et de vos stations, vous pouvez retourner
à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez sur entrée
pour écouter votre webradio Pandora
I’m tired of this track :
Si vous en avez assez d’une piste, vous pouvez
mettre la piste « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira
plus pendant un mois.
Create station from this artist :
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet
artiste.
PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage
commercial Pandora sont des marques
commerciales ou des marques déposées de la
société Pandora Media, Inc. Utilisées avec
autorisation.
personnalisée.
Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous
pouvez ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre
récepteur Onkyo en sélectionnant « I have a
Pandora Account » et y accéder en entrant
votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Fr-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le menu, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un canal, puis
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer la
lecture.
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis
uniquement)
2
3
Search :
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par
artiste, par album ou par piste.
Music Guide :
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to your
1
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un
compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des
genres,des meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs
albums, des meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et
des sélections du personnel.
Rhapsody Channels :
Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les
meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.
Playlists :
Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture
personnelles.
My Library :
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles
dans le catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My
Library.
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Remarque
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre
adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans
l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration
Web.
• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne
fonctionnent pas.
■ Eléments du menu
Add track to My Library :
Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.
Add album to My Library :
Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.
Add playlist to My Library :
Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.
Add channel to My Channels :
Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours
de lecture.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste
de lecture à la liste My Favorites.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Conseil
• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des
canaux Rhapsody marqués de My Library.
Fr-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign In », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le canal de
votre choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche
et vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(Amérique du Nord uniquement)
1
3
Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous
pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de
passe dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans
Configuration Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas
votre nom d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe,
appelez Sirius XM au (888) 539-7474 pour
obtenir une assistance.
Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai
gratuit de SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account
Info » affiche le nombre de jours restants dans votre
souhaitez continuer à écouter le service, vous devez
vous abonner. Pour vous inscrire, accédez à
l’adresse
Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Eléments du menu
Add to My Favorites :
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre
ordinateur.
Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
nom est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être
saisis dans l’ampli-tuner AV.
Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont
vendus séparément et sont subordonnés par les
conditions Sirius (voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous
de lire cet accord avant d’acquérir votre abonnement.
Sirius, XM et tous les logos et marques afférents sont
des marques déposées de Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de
ses filiales. Tous droits réservés.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes ci-
dessous à l’aide de la télécommande :
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran
« SiriusXM Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie
que vous pouvez sélectionner.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner la catégorie,
puis appuyez sur ENTER.
2
L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie
sélectionnée s’affiche.
Fr-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Profile :
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to
your account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous
pouvez vous y connecter pour sélectionner
« Sign in to your account ». Saisissez votre
nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe dans
l’écran clavier suivant.
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm
1
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently
Listened Tracks », « Library » et
« Neighbours ».
Account Info :
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.
Sign Out :
Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que
vous aimez…
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent.
Si vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une
trace de toutes les chansons que vous avez juste
jouées. Quand vous vous rendez sur le site Web de
Last.fm, vous pouvez voir les graphiques personnels
de la musique que vous avez appréciée, les partagez
avec vos amis et également voir ce qu’ils aiment.
Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.
■ Utilisation de l’écran clavier
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station, puis
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret le bouton ENTER pour
saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de
passe.
3
appuyez sur ENTER ou
lecture.
1
pour démarrer la
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.
Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un
choix infini de stations de radio personnalisées et
sans pub, Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir
de la musique. Créez aujourd’hui votre compte
Last.fm gratuit sur www.last.fm/join
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm
your entries » s’affiche.
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.
« Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm
Internet Radio » apparait.
■ Eléments du menu
I Love this track :
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture
augmente.
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur
de la radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV
Onkyo sans ordinateur !
Conseil
Ban this track :
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture
diminue.
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My
Favorites.
Recommended Radio :
Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées
futées qui changent en même temps que vos goûts.
Artist Radio :
Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous
jouerons une station entière de musique inspirée par
votre choix.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un menu puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
2
Search Station :
■ Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling
Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste,
par tag ou par nom d’utilisateur.
Top Artists Station :
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Enable », puis
My Library :
appuyez sur ENTER.
Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à
partir de toute la musique que vous avez entendue
depuis que vous avez joint Last.fm.
Tag Radio :
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et
nous vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux
évalués.
Top Tags Station :
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux
évalués.
Personal Station :
*
Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être
résiliés avec ou sans préavis.
Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles
dans certaines zones.
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station
personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your
Neighbourhood » et « Your
Recommendations »).
Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la
création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même
ce que cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts
des doigts. Les derniers prix et les informations
complètes sont disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe
Fr-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Utilisation d’une webradio
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les
touches sur la télécommande.
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio
6
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6
1
un à partir du site Web de Slacker
(www.slacker.com) à l’aide de votre
ordinateur.
■ Eléments du menu
Rate Song as Favorite :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et d’augmenter la probabilité que le
morceau soit lu de nouveau.
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des
informations à partir de la télécommande ou des
touches sur l’appareil principal.
Ban Song :
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que le
morceau soit lu de nouveau.
Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne
comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/r
pour sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur
ENTER.
Ban Artist :
2
3
Permet de stocker des informations sur le
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que les
morceaux de cet artiste soient lus de nouveau.
Mark Favorite :
Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à
vos favoris.
Unmark Favorite :
Permet de supprimer la station en cours de
lecture de vos favoris.
L’écran de confirmation des informations du
compte s’affiche.
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte,
sélectionnez « Access without Sign In », puis
appuyez sur ENTER pour utiliser une version
restreinte du service.
Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.
Add song to Library :
Permet d’ajouter la piste en cours de lecture à
votre bibliothèque.
Delete song from Library :
de votre bibliothèque.
Conseil
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs
comptes » (➔ page 1). L’identification peut être
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».
Add to My Favorites :
Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la
liste My Favorites.
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un élément du
4
5
menu, puis appuyez sur ENTER.
Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/wpour
sélectionner « Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis
appuyez sur ENTER.
la lecture depuis cette station.
L’écran de lecture apparaît.
Fr-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Uso de múltiples cuentas
®
Uso de Internet Radio
Pandora Internet Radio
El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de
usuario, lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar
libremente entre varios usuarios. Después de
registrar las cuentas de usuario, el acceso se realiza
desde la pantalla “Users”.
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)............... 2
Procedimientos comunes en el menú
Internet Radio
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)................... 3
Nota
Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de
usuarios.
Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
1
• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a
otra.
• Es posible que determinados servicios de red o contenidos
disponibles a través de este dispositivo no sean accesibles
si el proveedor del servicio da por finalizado el servicio.
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio
(solo Norteamérica).................................. 4
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o
borrar una existente.
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio...................... 5
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio.................... 6
Pulse NET.
1
Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se
iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea,
verifique que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente
conectado al receptor de AV.
Consejo
• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples
cuentas de usuario.
• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.
• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la
cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.
Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse
ENTER.
Aparecerá la página principal del servicio
seleccionado.
2
Es-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Delete this station:
Pandora® Internet Radio
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora en la
lista de emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
2
Esto eliminará de forma permanente una
emisora de su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la
información sobre sus aprobaciones/
desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere volver a
crear la emisora con el mismo tema o artista.
Create station from this track:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este tema.
Rename this station:
Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.
Bookmark this artist:
Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil
en www.pandora.com.
Bookmark this track:
Pandora marcará el tema actual y le permitirá
comprarlos todos en Amazon o iTunes ¡con un
solo paso!
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y
personalizado que reproduce la música que usted
conoce y le ayudará a descubrir música que le
encantará.
Create a New Station:
Introduzca el nombre de un tema, artista o
género; Pandora creará una emisora de radio
exclusiva para usted basada en las cualidades
musicales de ese tema, de ese artista o de ese
género.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “I have a Pandora
1
Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego
pulse ENTER.
■ Elementos del menú
I like this track:
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to
Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la
pantalla del televisor. Tome nota de este código.
Vaya a un ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija
el navegador a www.pandora.com/onkyo
Introduzca su código de activación y siga las
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y
sus emisoras de radio por Internet
Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) un tema, Pandora
reproducirá más música parecida.
I don’t like this track:
Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) el tema, Pandora
eliminará dicho tema de la emisora actual.
Why is this track playing?:
Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que
Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio
personalizadas.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
personalizadas de Pandora. Puede crear sus
propias emisoras introduciendo sus temas y
artistas favoritos cuando aparezca la solicitud
correspondiente. Una vez creada su cuenta y sus
emisoras, puede regresar al receptor Onkyo y
pulsar Enter para empezar a escuchar su radio
por Internet personalizada de Pandora.
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede
añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have
a Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su
dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.
I’m tired of this track:
PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la
imagen corporativa de Pandora son marcas
comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de
Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con permiso.
Si se cansa de un tema, puede “silenciarlo” de
modo que Pandora no lo reproduzca durante un
mes.
Create station from this artist:
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este
artista.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Es-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar el menú y luego
pulse ENTER.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y
luego pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la
reproducción.
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)
2
3
Search:
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your
1
account” y luego pulse ENTER.
Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o
canción.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si
todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo
Music Guide:
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas
principales, álbumes principales o canciones
principales, novedades, selección del sitio.
Rhapsody Channels:
Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por
los principales redactores de Rhapsody.
Playlists:
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione
“Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el
correo electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de
teclado que aparece a continuación o en la
configuración web.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,
6, RANDOM, REPEAT
Nota
• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no
funcionan.
■ Elementos del menú
Add track to My Library:
Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add album to My Library:
Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo
actualmente.
Add playlist to My Library:
Marca las listas de reproducción que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Add channel to My Channels:
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están
reproduciendo actualmente.
Reproduzca sus listas personales.
My Library:
Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en
el catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una canción, emisora o lista de
reproducción a la lista Mis favoritos.
Consejo
• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las
emisoras de Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.
Es-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego
pulse ENTER.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo
Norteamérica)
1
3
deseada y luego pulse ENTER.
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder
seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de
usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado
que aparece a continuación o en la configuración
web. Si no sabe su nombre de usuario o la
contraseña, llame a Sirius XM al número (888)
539-7474 para solicitar asistencia.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la
emisora seleccionada y ahora usted podrá
escuchar SiriusXM Internet Radio.
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita
de SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account
vez que termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir
escuchando este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para
suscribirse vaya a
Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6
■ Elementos del menú
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su
ordenador.
Consejo
Add to My Favorites:
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Cuando se suscriba, recibirá un nombre de usuario y
una contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor
de AV.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se
venden por separado y se rigen por las condiciones
de Sirius (consulte www.sirius.com). Lea
atentamente este acuerdo antes de comprar la
suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y logotipos
relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius XM
Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos
reservados.
Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el
receptor de AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para
usar el mando a distancia, siga este procedimiento:
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la
categoría disponible para la selección.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la categoría y
luego pulse ENTER.
2
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras
de la categoría seleccionada.
Es-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Profile:
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your
account”, y luego pulse ENTER.
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio
1
Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.
Sign Out:
Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le
gusta...
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede
acceder a ella para seleccionar “Sign in to your
account”. Introduzca su nombre de usuario y
contraseña en la siguiente pantalla de teclado.
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente.
Si tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un
seguimiento de todas las canciones que acaba de
escuchar. Cuando visite el sitio web de Last.fm,
podrá ver listas personales de la música que ha
disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y también
ver lo que les gusta a ellos.
Se desconecta de su cuenta.
■ Utilización de la pantalla de teclado
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y
luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la
reproducción.
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.
2. Seleccione “OK”.
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla
“Confirm your entries”.
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de
reproducción.
Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita
variedad de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin
publicidad, Last.fm es una forma excelente de
descubrir música. Cree hoy mismo una cuenta
gratuita de Last.fm en www.last.fm/join
4. Pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla
“Last.fm Internet Radio”.
■ Elementos del menú
I Love this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con
la que se reproduce.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm
Radio sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin
necesidad de un ordenador.
Ban this track:
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con
la que se reproduce.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego
pulse ENTER.
Recommended Radio:
2
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada
momento.
Search Station:
Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o
nombre de usuario.
Artist Radio:
■ Uso del control de scrobbling
Top Artists Station:
Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor
clasificados.
Top Tags Station:
Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas
mejor clasificadas.
Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una
emisora de radio inspirada exclusivamente en su
elección.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse
ENTER.
My Library:
*
Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por
Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música
que ha escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
terceros pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.
Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén
disponibles en algunas zonas.
Personal Station:
Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora
personalizada (“Your Library”, “Your
Neighbourhood” y “Your Recommendations”).
¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y
podrá escucharlo durante horas.
Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá
por sí mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del
mundo al alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los
precios actualizados y toda la información que desee
en www.last.fm/subscribe
Es-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uso de Internet Radio
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del
mando a distancia.
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio
6
Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web
de Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su
ordenador.
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6
1
■ Elementos del menú
Rate Song as Favorite:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea más probable que la canción se vuelva a
reproducir.
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione
“Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.
Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede
introducir información desde el mando a
distancia o desde el teclado de la unidad
principal.
Ban Song:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea menos probable que la canción se vuelva a
reproducir.
Si no hay errores en la información que ha
introducido, utilice q/w/e/rpara seleccionar
“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.
2
3
Ban Artist:
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que
sea menos probable que las canciones de este
artista se vuelvan a reproducir.
Mark Favorite:
Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a los favoritos.
Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la
información de la cuenta.
Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access
without Sign In” y pulse ENTER para utilizar
una versión restringida del servicio.
Unmark Favorite:
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.
Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de los favoritos.
Add song to Library:
Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente a su biblioteca.
Consejo
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (➔ página 1). Se
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego
Delete song from Library:
4
5
pulse ENTER.
Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo
actualmente de la biblioteca.
Add to My Favorites:
Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis
favoritos.
Para salir, utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign out”
en esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.
reproducción de la emisora.
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.
Es-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Using Multiple Accounts
Using Internet Radio
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,
which means you can freely switch between several
logins. After registering user accounts, login is
performed from the “Users” screen.
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 2
Common Procedures in Internet Radio
Menu
Note
Press MENU while the Users screen is
displayed.
The following menu items appear:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.
• Certain network service or contents available through this
device may not be accessible in case the service provider
terminates its service.
You can either store a new user account, or
delete an existing one.
Press NET.
1
A list of the network services appears, and the
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV
receiver.
Tip
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user
accounts.
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.
Select the desired service and press ENTER.
The top page of the selected service appears.
2
En-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Internet Radio
Profile:
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,
and then press ENTER.
Using Last.fm Internet Radio
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.
Account Info:
Confirm your account information.
Sign Out:
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you
love...
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your
account”. Enter your user name and password in
the next keyboard screen.
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and
see what they like, too.
It signs out from your account.
■ Using the keyboard screen
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your
user name and password.
2. Select “OK”.
or 1 to start playback.
Playback starts and the playback screen
appears.
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”
screen appears.
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at
www.last.fm/join
Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6
4. Press ENTER.
“Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm
Internet Radio” screen appears.
■ Menu Items
I Love this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency increases.
Ban this track:
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and
playback frequency reduces.
Add to My Favorites:
Tip
UK and Germany only:
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using
Multiple Accounts” (➔ page 1). Login can be made
from the “Users” screen.
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without
a computer!
Recommended Radio:
Discover smart personalised recommendations that
adapt as your tastes change.
Use q/wto select menu and then press
ENTER.
2
Adds a station to My Favorites list.
Search Station:
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User
Name.
■ Using scrobbling control
Artist Radio:
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of
music inspired by your choice.
My Library:
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.
Tag Radio:
Top Artists Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.
Top Tags Station:
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.
Personal Station:
You can play tracks from personalized station
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and
“Your Recommendations”).
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be
terminated with or without notice.
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll
entertain you with it for hours.
Start your free trial straight away when you create
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest
prices and full information are available at
www.last.fm/subscribe
En-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internetradio verwenden
Verwendung mehrerer Konten
Internetradio verwenden
Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten,
was bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren
Logins umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der
Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm
aus vorgenommen.
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio..... 2
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den
Internetradio-Menüs
Anmerkung
Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm
• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.
• Bestimmte Netzwerkdienste oder über dieses Gerät zur
Verfügung stehende Inhalte stehen eventuell nicht zur
Verfügung, falls der Service-Anbieter seine Dienstleistung
beendet.
1
des Nutzers angezeigt wird.
Das folgende Menü erscheint:
Add new user:
Remove this user:
Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto
abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.
Drücken Sie NET.
1
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und
die NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt,
überprüfen Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-
Receiver eingesteckt ist.
Tipp
• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen
Nutzerkonten zu.
• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.
• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich
zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann
wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und
drücken Sie ENTER.
Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services
erscheint.
2
De-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internetradio verwenden
können. Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende
Infos sind unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich
Personal Station:
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio
Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich
angepassten Sender wiedergeben („Your
Library“, „Your Neighbourhood“ und „Your
Recommendations“).
Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre
Lieblingsmusik merkt...
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your
1
account“ auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie
ENTER.
Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto
verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign
in to your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der
folgenden Tastaturanzeige ein.
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie
ein kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden
darin alle kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie
die Last.fm-Website besuchen, können Sie Ihre
persönlichen Charts der von Ihnen abgespielten Musik
anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden und sehen Sie
auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.
Profile:
Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,
„Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.
Account Info:
Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.
Sign Out:
■ Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige
schier endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten,
werbefreien Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige
Gelegenheit, um Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich
Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-Konto noch heute unter
www.last.fm/join
Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.
1. Verwenden Sie
Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.
2. Wählen Sie „OK“.
3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm
your entries“ erscheint.
q
/
w
/
e
/
r
und den ENTER, um
Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER
oder 1 , um die Wiedergabe zu starten.
Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die
Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.
3
4. Drücken Sie ENTER.
erscheint die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.
Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch
ohne Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm-
Radiosender auf Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!
Recommended Radio:
Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste
Empfehlungen, die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack
verändern.
Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6
■ Menüsymbole
I Love this track:
Tipp
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-
Server gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der
Wiedergabe wird erhöht.
• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,
schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer
Konten“ nach (➔ Seite 1). Das Login kann vom
„Users“-Bildschirm aus erfolgen.
Ban this track:
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-
Server gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der
Wiedergabe wird verringert.
Add to My Favorites:
Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste hinzu.
Artist Radio:
Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.
Search Station:
2
Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir
spielen für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch
Ihre Wahl inspirierter Musik.
Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten,
Tags oder Benutzernamen suchen.
Top Artists Station:
My Library:
Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an
einer Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer
Mitgliedschaft bei Last.fm gehört haben.
Tag Radio:
Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen
Musikstil und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.
■ Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten
Interpreten wiedergeben.
Top Tags Station:
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags
wiedergeben.
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und
dann drücken Sie ENTER.
*
Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte Internetradio-
Dienste können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung
eingestellt werden.
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie
Ihr Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es
ist, jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu
In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste
eventuell nicht verfügbar.
Y1212-1
SN 29401479IREU
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 9 I R E U *
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”
button and “Display” button.
Remote Control Codes
/
1
2
Notes:
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.
• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control
code.
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.
Notes:
• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.
• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for
that component.
• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until
it matches your component.
• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.
• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited
to part of the component’s functionality.
• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to
change by the manufacturer.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Codes de télécommande
Códigos de control remoto
Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez
associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant
environ 3 secondes).
Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un
código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3
segundos).
1
1
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le
bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».
Remarques :
Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.
En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por
ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.
Notas:
• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi
zone.
• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.
• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].
• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de
mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos
botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione
componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione
[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.
• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].
• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes
de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,
ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]
lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.
Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para
introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.
El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.
Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE
MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.
Notas:
• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.
• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos
componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede
activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.
• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno
hasta que coincida con su componente.
• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.
• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad
esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.
2
Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres
à l’aide des boutons numérotés.
2
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.
Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE
MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.
Remarques :
• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.
• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le
préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.
• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce
que cela corresponde à votre appareil.
• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.
• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être
limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.
• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del
mando a distancia.
• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,
pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.
• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande
existants.
• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la
liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Codici del telecomando
Fernbedienungscodes
Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il
Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.
Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum
Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.
Hinweise:
1
1
codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,
tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.
Note:
• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi
zona.
• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet
werden.
• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.
• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die
Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.
Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit
eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle
angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.
• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.
• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.
Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5
cifre.
2
Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen
Herstellercode ein.
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.
Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die
REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.
Hinweise:
• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.
• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen
Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.
• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln
einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.
2
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.
Note:
• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.
• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale
apparecchio.
• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.
• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.
• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata
a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.
• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist
nicht garantiert.
• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre
Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.
• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung
neue Codes hinzuzufügen.
• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.
• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.
• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind
Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Afstandsbedieningscodes
Fjärrstyrningskoder
Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code
Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt
som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.
På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,
”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.
1
1
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening gaat branden.
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,
de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.
Anmärkningar:
Opmerkingen:
• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.
• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].
• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi
zone-toets.
• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst
kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som
ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som
du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska
• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].
• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de
afstandsbedieningscode.
Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.
Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODE-
knappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.
2
Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.
2
Anmärkningar:
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.
Opmerkingen:
• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van
uw AV-receiver.
• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.
• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.
• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika
komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta
förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.
• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de
stämmer överens med din utrustning.
• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.
• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet
vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.
• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.
• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.
• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.
• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet
gegarandeerd.
• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.
•
Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.
• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
遙控代碼
在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕時，同時按住
遥控代码
按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮的同时，按住[DISPLAY
（显示）]（大约 3 秒钟）。
1
1
[DISPLAY] （顯示）（約 3 秒）。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。
在 Integra 系列產品上，按鈕名稱為大寫。例如，「Remote Mode」（遙控模式）
按鈕和 「Display」（顯示）按鈕。
REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯亮起。
Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如，“Remote Mode（遥控模
式）”按钮和“Display（显示）”按钮。
注意：
注意：
• [RECEIVER（接收机）]和多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。
• 只能为[TV（电视）]输入电视遥控编码。
• [RECEIER] （接收機）和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。
• 您只能為 [TV] （電視）輸入電視遙控編碼。
• 除 [RECEIVER] （接收機）、[TV] （電視）和多區域按鈕外，您可針對 REMOTE MODE
（遙控模式）按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。但是，這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按
鈕，因此，請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。例如，如果
要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上，則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。
•
除[RECEIVER（接收机）]、[TV（电视）]和多区域按钮外，不能为 REMOTE MODE（遥
控模式）按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码。但是，这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮，因
此，选择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮。例如，如果
要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端，应在输入遥控编码时选择[TV/CD（电视/CD）]。
在 30 秒內，使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。
REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。
如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼，REMOTE MODE （遙控模式）按鈕 / 遙控指示燈
會慢慢地閃爍一次。
REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯闪烁两次。
如果不能顺利输入遥控编码，REMOTE MODE（遥控模式）按钮/遥控指示灯会
缓慢闪烁一次。
2
2
注意：
注意：
• 視您的 AV 接收機型號而定，遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。
• 遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼，您
可啟用該設備的相關預設值。
• 根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同，遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。
• 遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码，便
可激活相应设备的相关预设。
• 當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時，請嘗試一個接著一個輸入，直到與您的設備對應
為止。
• 单个制造商关联多个编码时，请尝试逐个输入，直至符合当前设备。
• 根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同，无法保证兼容性。
• 視設備的型號和年份而定，並不保證與本公司產品相容。
• 在某些型號上，遙控器可能無法作用，或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。
• 除此之外，您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。
• 对于某些产品类型，遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。
• 此外，可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。
• 尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的，但制造商会随时更改。
• 雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確，製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Cable/PVR Combination
Cable Set Top Box
ADB
Cable Set Top Box
Neuf TV
Noos
Cable Set Top Box
Visiopass
02254, 02769
02769
03107
00817
01376
01877
Time Warner
UPC
01376, 01877, 02187
01582
Aon
00817
VTR
Arris
02187
NTL
01068, 01060
02767
WideOpenWest
Ziggo
Videotron
VTR
01877
AT&T
00858
Numericable
Ono
00660, 01666, 02015,
02142, 02447, 02774
01376
Bright House
BT Vision
Cable & Wireless
Cable One
Cablecom
Cablevision
Charter
01376, 01877
02294
01068, 01562
01060
WideOpenWest
Ziggo
01877
Optus
02142
Cable/PVR Combination
01068
Orange
Pace
00817
Arris
02187
IPTV
01376, 01877
01582
01376, 01877, 01068,
01060, 01982
Bright House
Cable One
Cablevision
Charter
01376, 01877
01376, 01877
01376, 01877
01376, 01877, 02187
01877, 01982
ADB
02254, 02769
02769
Panasonic
Philips
01488, 01982
Aon
01376, 01877
01376, 01877, 02187
00817, 01582, 02294,
02767
AT&T
BT Vision
Canal+
Cisco
00858
02294
Cisco
01877, 00858, 01982,
02345, 02378
Pioneer
RCN
01877, 01500
01376
Cisco
02657
Comcast
01376, 01877, 01982,
02187
Com Hem
Comcast
00817, 00660, 01666,
02015, 02447
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
Rogers
Sagem
Samsung
01877
Kreatel
mio TV
Motorola
Cox
01376, 01877
02187
01376, 01877, 01982,
02187
00817
02802
Digeo
01877, 01060, 01666,
02015, 02774
01376, 00858, 01998,
02378
Cox
01376, 01877
01877
Freebox
Humax
01482
Daeryung
Digeo
Scientific Atlanta
01877, 00858, 01982,
02345
02142, 03051, 03053
01376, 01877
03051, 03053
01877
Neuf TV
Pace
03107
02187
Insight
02657
SFR
03107
DX Antenna
France Telecom
Freebox
Fujitsu
01500
J:COM
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
00858, 02345
03107
Shaw
01376
00817
Knology
Mediacom
Motorola
Moxi
SingTel
Sony
01998, 02802
01460
01482
01376, 01877
01376
SingTel
01998, 02802
01385
01497
TeliaSonera
Telus
Stofa
02015
Humax
00660, 02142, 02447,
03051, 03053
02187
02345
Suddenlink
Sumitomo
Telewest
TeliaSonera
Telus
01376, 01877
01500
Numericable
Pace
02767
Thomson
Verizon
02769
Insight
01376, 01877
03051, 03053
01877
01877
02378
J:COM
01068
Panasonic
Philips
01982
Knology
Kreatel
01385
01582, 02767
01877
IPTV/PVR Combination
01385
02345
Pioneer
ADB
02769
Macab
00817
Thomson
Time Warner
Toshiba
UPC
01582, 01982, 02769
01376, 01877, 02187
01509
Rogers
01877
Aon
02769
Mediacom
mio TV
Motorola
01376, 01877
02802
Samsung
Scientific Atlanta
Shaw
01877
AT&T
BT Vision
Cisco
00858
01877, 01982
01376
02294
01376, 00858, 01562,
01982, 01998, 02378
01582
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
Verizon
Videotron
Virgin Media
02378
Suddenlink
Thomson
01376, 01877
01582
Kreatel
Motorola
Moxi
NEC
02187
01496
01877
00858, 02378
01068, 01060
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
IPTV/PVR Combination
CD
CD
MD
Neuf TV
Philips
03107
Harman/Kardon
Hitachi
Integra
JVC
70157
Rotel
70157
Onkyo
Sony
70868
02294
00858
03107
02378
70032
SAE
70157
70490, 70000
72977
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
71817, 70101
70072
Sansui
70157
TEAC
Yamaha
SAST
70157
70490
Verizon
Kenwood
Krell
70626, 70157, 70036
70157
Siemens
Silsonic
Simaudio
Sonic Frontiers
Sony
70157
Cassette Deck
Aiwa
70036
CD/Cassette Dock
40029
40076
40029
40029
40076
40029
40029
40070
40244
40070
40029
40029
40029
42157
40027
40029
40027
40029
40029
40027
40029
40029
40243
40029
40244
40027, 40029
40097
Linn
70157
70157
TASCAM
73095
Arcam
Loewe
Magnavox
Marantz
Matsui
MCS
70157
70157
Audiolab
Carver
70157
70490, 70000
70157
CD
70626, 70029, 70157
70157
Sylvania
TAG McLaren
Tandy
Advantage
AH!
70032
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
70157
Denon
70157
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Inkel
70029
70032
Aiwa
Memorex
Meridian
Micromega
Miro
70032
TASCAM
TEAC
73533, 73095
73531, 73551, 73532
70029, 70303
70157
Arcam
70157
Atoll Electronique
Audio Research
Audiolab
Audiomeca
Audioton
AVI
JVC
70157
Technics
Thorens
Thule Audio
Traxdata
Universum
Victor
Kenwood
Magnavox
Marantz
Myryad
Onkyo
70000
Mission
Myryad
NAD
70157
70157
70157
70626
70000, 70721
70157
70157
Naim
70072
Balanced Audio
Technology
Optimus
Philips
NSM
70157
Wards
70000, 70032, 70157
70490, 70032, 70036
70157
Onkyo
Optimus
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Primare
Proton
71817
Yamaha
Zonda
Cairn
70157
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Radiola
RCA
70000, 70032
70029, 70303
70626, 70157
70032, 70101
70157
California Audio Labs 70029, 70303
Cambridge
Cambridge Audio
Carver
70157
CD-R
70157
Denon
JVC
70626, 70766
70072
70157
Revox
CCE
70157
Kenwood
Marantz
Onkyo
Philips
Sony
70626
Sansui
70157
Cyrus
70157
70626
Sony
70157
Denon
70626, 70766
70000
71323
Thorens
Victor
QED
70157
DKK
70626
Quad
70157
DMX Electronics
Dynaco
70157
70000
Wards
Quasar
Radiola
RCA
70029
70157
TASCAM
71830, 72304
Yamaha
70157
Genexxa
Goldmund
Grundig
70000, 70032
70157
70032
CD-R/MD
Accessory
Restek
Revox
70157
70157
TASCAM
73511
Apple
81115
70157
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Accessory
Jamo
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
82228
Alba
01284
Centrex
CGV
01457
Durabrand
Echostar
01284
Logitech
Onkyo
82182
Allvision
Amstrad
01334
01413, 01567
01334, 01626
01176
00775, 00853, 01323,
01409, 02527
82990, 81993, 82351
82228
00847, 01175, 01662,
01693
Chess
Eco-Star
Edision
01413
Polk Audio
CityCom
Clatronic
Clayton
Com Hem
Comag
Comsat
Coship
Crown
Ansonic
Arnion
02418
01631
01413
01300
Elap
01413, 01567
02418
Video - Accessory
ADB
01626
ASCI
01334
Elbe
02254, 02769
02769
01176, 01915
01413
AssCom
Astro
00853
Energy Sistem
Engel
01631, 02418
01251
Aon
00173, 01100
02418
Apple
02615
01413
Atlanta
Atsat
EuroLine
Europhon
Europsat
Expressvu
Fagor
01251
AT&T
00858
01457
01300
01334
BT Vision
Canal+
02294
01284
AtSky
01334
01413, 01611
00775
02657
CS
01631
Audiola
Aurora
02418
Cisco
00858, 02345, 02378
01385
Cyfra+
Cyfrowy Polsat
D-box
01409
00879, 00642, 01433
00879, 00642, 01259
01631
01611
Kreatel
00853, 02527
00723, 01114
01626
Austar
Ferguson
Finlux
01291
mio TV
Motorola
02802
Avanit
01626
01376, 00858, 01998,
02378
Dantax
Denver
Dgtec
Awa
02418
Fly Com
FMD
01457
02418
Neuf TV
Pace
03107
Axil
01413, 01457, 02418
01626
01413, 01457
00879, 01176, 01356
02408
01631, 02418
02418
02657
Axitronic
Balmet
Bell ExpressVu
Belson
Foxtel
Dick Smith
Electronics
Philips
02294
01457
Freesat
Scientific Atlanta
SFR
00858, 02345
03107
00775
Digi Raum Electronics 01176
Fuba
00173, 01251
00853, 00879
01176
02418
Digiality
Digihome
DigiLogic
DigiQuest
Digisky
01334
Galaxis
SingTel
TeliaSonera
Telus
01998, 02802
01385
Big Sat
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Boshmann
Boston
01457
01284
General Satellite
Globo
01284
01284
01251, 01334, 01626
00775
02345
00173
01300, 01457, 01631
01457
GOI
Thomson
Verizon
02769
01413, 01631
01251
Gold Box
Gold Vision
GoldMaster
Goodmans
Gradiente
Grandin
Grocos
00853
02378
DigitalBox
Digiwave
DirecTV
Dish Network
Dishpro
01100, 01631
01631
01631
Boxer
01458
01334
Receiver
British Sky
00847, 01175, 01662
01377, 00099
00775
01284, 01291
00099, 00887
01626
Onkyo
52503
Broadcasting
BskyB
00847, 01175, 01662
01284, 01291, 01626
00853, 01334
00775
Satellite Set Top Box
Bush
DishTV
01300
01409, 01457
@sat
01300
Canal Digital
Canal Satellite
Canal+
DRE
01176
Grundig
00847, 00853, 00173,
00879, 01284, 01291
@Sky
01334
00853, 02657
Dream Multimedia
DSE
01237
Acoustic Solutions
ADB
01284
00853, 02657
Haier
Hallo
02418
01626
02280, 02418
00879, 00642, 01433
00642, 00887, 01259
01626
CanalSat
00853, 02657
DSTV
Akura
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
Hama
01567
Leiko
01626
Pace
00847, 00853, 00887,
01175, 01323, 01356,
01423, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02059, 02060,
02211, 02657
Sat Industrie
SAT+
01611
Hanseatic
Hirschmann
Hitachi
Hornet
01100
00173
01284
01300
00775
Lemon
01334
01409
Lenoxx
Linsar
01611
Satplus
01100
01284
SatyCon
01631
Listo
01626
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Schwaiger
Sedea Electronique
SEG
02418
Pacific
01284
HTS
Lodos
01284
01206, 01251
01334, 01457, 01631
01206, 01626
01251, 01284, 01626
01611
Palcom
Panasat
Panasonic
01409, 01611
00879, 01433
Humax
01377, 01176, 01427,
01675, 01808, 01882,
01915, 02144, 02408,
02616
Logik
01284
Macab
00853
00847, 01304, 01404,
03099
Manhattan
Maspro
Matsui
01300
Panda
Pass
00173
00173
Servimat
ServiSat
ID Digital
ID Sat
01176
01567
00173, 01284, 01626
01334
01251
01334
peeKTon
Philips
01457, 02418
Maximum
Mediabox
Mediacom
MediaSat
Medion
MegaSat
Metronic
Shark
01631
ILLUSION sat
Imperial
Indovision
iNETBOX
Inno Hit
Innova
01631
00099, 00853, 00173,
01114, 00887, 00133,
02211
00853
Sherwood
Siemens
01409
01195, 01334
00887
01206
00173, 01334, 01626,
02418
00853
01237
Phoenix
Pino
02418
Sigmatek
SKY
02418
01334, 01626
01631
01626
01334
00099, 00847, 00887,
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754
00099
Pioneer
PMB
00853, 01308
01611
01334, 01413, 01631,
02418
inVion
02418
iotronic
01413
SKY Brazil
SKY Deutschland
SKY Italia
00887
Premiere
Pro Basic
Proline
QNS
00723
Metz
00173
ISkyB
00887
02754
00853
Moserbaer
Movistar
Multichoice
01251
ITT
02418
00853, 01693, 01850
02211
01284
02527, 02761
ITT Nokia
Jadeworld
Jaeger
00723
SKY New Zealand
SKY PerfecTV!
Sky XL
01404
00879, 00642, 01433,
02059, 02060
00642
02299, 02616, 03099
01251
RCA
01291
01334
Regal
01251
MySky
NEOTION
Netsat
01356, 01693, 01850
01334
JVC
00775
Sky+
01175, 01662
Roadstar
Rollmaster
Rownsonic
SAB
00853
KabelBW
Kaon
01195, 01882, 01915
01300
Skymaster
01334, 01409, 01567,
01611
01413
00099, 00887
00723
01567
Nikko
Skymax
Skyplus
01413
Kathrein
Kenwood
Koenig
00173, 01561, 01567
00853
01251, 01300, 01631
01114
Nokia
00853, 00723, 01223
01611
01175, 01334
01100
Sagem
Saivod
Samsung
Nordmende
NPG
SkySat
01631
02418
01631
Skyvision
SM Electronic
Smart
01334
Kreiling
Kreiselmeyer
L&S Electronic
LaSAT
01626
01377, 00853, 01175,
01206, 01458, 01662,
02986
Onn
01284
01409
00173
Optex
01413, 01611, 01626
00879, 01356
01334
01404, 01413, 01631
01457
01334
Optus
Sansui
01251
01626
01300
SmartVision
Sony
00173
Orbis
Sanyo
00847, 00853, 01558,
02299
Lava
01631
Orbitech
01100, 01195
Sat Control
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Satellite Set Top Box
Satellite Set Top Box
SAT/PVR Combination
SAT/PVR Combination
Star
00887
UBC
00642
Canal+
02657
SKY Deutschland
SKY Italia
SKY New Zealand
SKY PerfecTV!
Sky+
02754
Stream System
Strong
01300
UEC
00879, 01356
01251, 01626, 02418
01882
CanalSat
02657
01693, 01850
02211
00853, 00879, 01284,
01300, 01409, 01626,
02418
United
Cyfrowy Polsat
DigiQuest
DirecTV
02527
Unitymedia
Universum
Variosat
VEA
01300
02299, 03099
01662
00173, 01251
00173
01377, 00099, 20739
00775
Sunny
01300
Dish Network
Dishpro
Skyplus
01175, 01334
01631
Sunstar
00642
02418
00775
Smart
Supernova
Supratech
Systec
00887
Vestel
01251, 01284
01195
Dream Multimedia
Echostar
01237
Sony
02299
01413
Viasat
00775, 02527
01631
Stream System
Strong
01300
01334
Vision
01626
Edision
01300
Sytech
02418
Visiosat
Vitecom
Vivax
01413, 01457
01413
Expressvu
Foxtel
00775
Sunny
01300
TBoston
TEAC
01251, 02418
01251
01356
TechniSat
Technosat
Telefonica
Telestar
01195
02418
Humax
01808
01206
Technical
Technika
TechniSat
Technosat
Techwood
TELE System
Telefonica
Telestar
01626
Volcasat
Wavelength
Wharfedale
Wisi
02418
02527
01284
ID Sat
01334
01413
01195
01100, 01195
01206
iNETBOX
Kaon
01237
01284
Thomson
Topfield
01175, 01662
01206
01300
00173
01251, 01284, 01626
01251, 01409, 01611
02527, 02761
Kathrein
Maximum
Mediacom
MegaSat
Movistar
Multichoice
MySky
01561
Worldsat
Woxter
Xsat
01251
Viasat
01195
01334
02418
Xtreme
01300
01206
00847, 01323
01300
01100, 01195, 01251,
01334, 01626
01631
Television
A.R. Systems
Accent
Xtreme
Yakumo
Yes
02527
10556, 10037
10037
01413
Televes
Televisa
Tevion
01300, 01334
00887
02059, 02060
01356, 01693, 01850
01334
00887
Acer
11339
Zehnder
01251, 01334, 01413,
01631
01409
NEOTION
Pace
Acoustic Solutions
Action
11037, 11667
10650
Thomson
00847, 00853, 01175,
01046, 01291, 01662
Zinwell
02280, 02761
01175, 01356, 01423,
01662, 01693, 01850,
02059, 02060, 02211,
02657
Addison
AEG
10653
Tonna
Topfield
Toshiba
Trevi
01611
01206
01284
01251
SAT/PVR Combination
11037, 11324
12719
@sat
01300
Agfaphoto
Aiko
Panasonic
Philips
01304, 03099
00099
Amstrad
Atsat
01175, 01662, 01693
01300
10037
Aim
10037, 10499
Triax
00853, 01251, 01291,
01413, 01611, 01626,
01631
Samsung
01175, 01206, 01662
01300
Bell ExpressVu
00775
Akai
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10208,
11675
Sat Control
Schneider
Sedea Electronique
SKY
British Sky
Broadcasting
01175, 01662
01206
Tricolor TV
True Visions
Twinner
01176
02408
01611
01206
BskyB
01175, 01662
02657
Akiba
Akito
10037
10037
01175, 01662, 01693,
01850, 02754
Canal Satellite
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Belstar
Television
Classic
Television
DMTech
Domeos
Drean
Akura
10171, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11363,
11585, 11667, 11709
11037
10499
12001
10668
10037
10698
Beon
10037
Clatronic
Clayton
Condor
10037, 10714, 11324
11037
Berthen
10556, 10668
10037
Alba
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11585
Bestar
10037
DSE
Bexa
12493
Conrowa
Contec
10698
Dual
10037, 11037, 11585,
11667
Alien
11037
Black Diamond
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
11037
10037
Allstar
10037
Durabrand
10178, 10171, 10714,
11037, 11652
10195
Cosmel
CPTEC
Crown
10037
Amstrad
Anam
10171, 10037, 11037
10037
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10715, 10499, 11324,
11363, 11652, 11709
10625, 11363
Dux
10037
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715, 10208,
11652
Anam National
Andersson
Anitech
Ansonic
AOC
10037, 10650
11585
DX Antenna
Dynatron
Dynex
11817, 13817
10037
10037
Boca
11652
Cyberpix
D-Vision
Daewoo
11667
12049
10037, 10668
10178, 10625, 11365
10037, 10714
10037
Boman
Bork
11324
10556, 10037
e-motion
E:max
11709
11363
10178, 10556, 10037,
10634, 10499, 12098
11324
Ardem
BPL
10037, 10208
10625, 10714, 10560
11709
Easy Living
ECE
11666, 11709
10037
Arena
Brandt
Brimax
Brinkmann
Brionvega
Bush
Dansai
Dantax
10037, 10208
Aristona
ART
10556, 10037
11037
10714, 11037, 10715,
11652
Elbe
10556, 10037
11755
10037, 10668
10037
Electrograph
Element
Elfunk
Datsura
Dawa
10208
Art Mito
Asberg
Astra
11585
11886
10037
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10208, 11585, 11652,
11667, 12719
11037
Daytron
De Graaf
DEC
10037
10037
ELG
10037
10208
ATD
10698
Elin
10037
11709
Atlantic
Audiosonic
Audioworld
Aventura
Axxon
10037
Elite
10037
Byd:sign
Camper
Carad
12140, 12209
10037
Decca
10037
10037, 10714, 10715
10698
Emerson
10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11394,
11864, 11886
Denver
Desmet
Diamant
Diamond
10037, 11709
10037
10668, 11037
10037
10171
Carena
10037
Envision
Epson
11365, 11506
11379
10714
Carrefour
Cascade
Casio
10037
10698
Baird
10208
10037
Dick Smith
Electronics
10698
Erres
10037
Barco
10556
10037
ESA
10171
Basic Line
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037
Cathay
10037
Digatron
Digihome
Digiline
Digitek
Digitor
Dixi
10037
ESC
10037
CCE
10037
11667
Baur
10037, 10195, 10512
10178
Euroman
Europa
Europhon
Evesham
Excello
Exquisit
10037
Centrum
Centurion
Changhong
Chimei
Clarivox
11037
10037, 10668
11709
Beaumark
Beijing
Beko
10037
10037
10208
10037
10508
10037, 10698
10037
10037, 10714, 10715,
11652
11248, 11667
11037
11666
10037
Belson
10698
DL
11363
10037
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Television
Hoeher
Television
Karcher
Kathrein
Kendo
Ferguson
10037, 10625, 10560,
10195, 11037, 11585
Goodmans
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10560, 10668,
10634, 11037, 10499,
11585, 11667
10714
10037
11666
11295
10714, 11324
10556
Hornyphon
Hugoson
Humax
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
10171, 10037, 10512
10208
10037, 11037, 11585
11037
Kennex
Kioto
Gorenje
Gradiente
Graetz
11585
10556, 10037, 10714,
10715, 11248, 11667
Hypson
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10715
10556
10037
Kiton
10037, 10668
10037
10714
Firstline
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10208,
11363
Hyundai
Iberia
11037, 10698
10037
KLL
Granada
Grandin
10037, 10560, 10208
Kneissel
Koenig
Kolin
10556, 10037, 10499
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10715,
11652
ICE
10037
Fisher
10208
iLo
11394
10150, 10037, 11610,
11755
Flint
10037
Imperial
Indiana
Ingelen
Inno Hit
Innova
Insignia
Integra
Interbuy
Interfunk
Internal
Intervision
Irradio
IRT
10037
Grundig
10556, 10037, 10195,
11223, 11667, 12625
Formenti
Fraba
10037
10037
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Kosmos
Kunlun
L&S Electronic
Lavic
10037
10037
GVA
11363, 12098
12001
10714
10037, 10714
10037
Friac
10037, 10499
11709
H & B
11037, 11585
10037
Fujicom
Fujitsu
Fujitsu Siemens
Funai
Haier
10037, 10698, 10508
10178
10037
10809
Hallmark
Hankook
Hanseatic
10171, 11423, 12049
11807, 13100, 13500
10037
10208
10809, 11248, 11666
10178
10714
10171, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11394, 11666,
11817, 13817
10556, 10037, 10625,
10714, 10634, 10499,
12001
11363
10037, 10512
10556
Lavis
11037
G-Hanz
Gaba
11363
11037
10037
10037
11755
Lecson
Lenco
10037
Hantarex
Hantor
10037
10037
10037, 11037
10037
10037
Galaxi
Galaxis
Gateway
GE
10037
Leyco
Harwood
Hauppauge
HB
10037
10698
LG
10178, 10556, 10037,
10714, 10715, 10698,
11423, 11768, 11840,
12182, 12358, 12424,
12834
10037
Isukai
ITS
10037
11324
10178, 11454, 10625,
10560
10037
HCM
10037
ITT
10208
Highline
Hinari
10037
GEC
10037
ITT Nokia
ITV
10208
Liesenkoetter
Lifetec
10037
10037, 10208
10714
Genesis
Genexxa
GFM
10037
10037
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 12001
Hisawa
Hisense
10037
JGC
11709
10556, 10508, 10208,
11363, 12098
10171, 11864, 11886
11585
Linsar
11585
Jinfeng
Jinxing
JMB
10208
Godrej
Goldfunk
GoldStar
Local India TV
Local Malaysia TV
Lodos
10208
10556, 10037, 10698
10556, 10634, 10499
10556
Hitachi
10150, 10178, 10037,
10634, 11037, 10508,
10499, 10578, 11576,
11585, 11643, 11667,
11691, 12433
10668
10698
10178, 10037, 10714,
10715
11037
Jubilee
JVC
Loewe
10037, 10512, 11884
11037, 10698
10668
10650, 10653, 10508,
11428, 11601, 12271
Logik
Hitachi Fujian
Hitec
10150
10698
Kaisui
10037
Logix
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Luma
Television
Metronic
Metz
Television
NetTV
Television
Orline
11037
10625
11755
10037
Lumatron
Lumenio
Lux May
Luxor
10037, 10668
10037
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037
Neufunk
New Tech
Newave
Nikkai
10556, 10037, 10714
10556, 10037
10178
Ormond
Osaki
10668, 11037
10556, 10037
10037
MGA
10150, 10178
10037
Osio
Micromaxx
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 11324, 12001
11037, 10208
10178
10037
Osume
10037
LXI
Nikkei
10714
Otto Versand
10556, 10037, 10195,
10512
Microspot
Mikomi
11614
M Electronic
10037, 10714, 10634,
10195, 10512, 11652
Nikko
10178
11037, 11585
10037
Pacific
10556, 10714, 11037,
11324
Nokia
10208
Minato
Madison
10037
Norcent
Nordmende
11365
Minerva
10195, 11248
11667
Palladium
Palsonic
Panama
10556, 10037, 10714
10037, 10698
10037
Magnavox
10171, 11454, 11365,
11506, 11755, 11867,
12372
10037, 10714, 10560,
10195, 11585, 11667,
12001
Ministry Of Sound
Minoka
10037
Magnum
Manesth
Manhattan
Marantz
Mark
10037, 10714, 10715
10037
Mirai
11666
Normerel
Nortek
Novatronic
Novita
Nu-Tec
O.K.Line
Oceanic
Odys
10037
Panasonic
11480, 10037, 10650,
10508, 10208, 11636,
12170
Mitsubishi
10150, 11250, 10178,
10556, 10037, 11037,
10512, 11171
10668
10037, 10668, 11037
11454, 10556, 10037
10037, 10714, 10715
10499
10037
Panavision
Panda
10037
11585
Mivar
10609
10698, 10508, 10208
11636
10698
Moree
10037
Pansonic
Penney
Perdio
Master's
Mastro
11037, 11324
10208
Morgan's
Moserbaer
MTC
10037
10178
10698
11585
10037
Masuda
Matsui
10037
12719
10512
Perfekt
Petters
10037
10556, 10037, 10714,
10195, 11037, 10208,
11666, 11667
Okano
OKI
10037
MTlogic
Mudan
Multitec
Multitech
Myrica
Myryad
NAD
10714
10037
11585, 11667
11610, 12124
10698
10208
Philco
10178, 10171, 10037,
11394
Olevia
Omni
Matsushita
Maxent
Maxess
Meck
10650
10037, 10668, 11037
10037
11755
Philips
10178, 10171, 11454,
10556, 10037, 10512,
10605, 10690, 11394,
11506, 11867, 12372
Onei
11667
12493
11666
Onida
10653
10698
10556
Onimax
Onix
10714
Mediator
Medion
10556, 10037
10178, 10037
10037
Phocus
Phoenix
Phonola
Pioneer
10714, 11652
10037
10698
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 10698,
10512, 11248, 11585,
11667, 12001, 12719
Naiko
Onkyo
Onn
11807, 13100, 13500
11667, 11709
11709
Nakimura
National
NEC
10037
10556, 10037
10508, 10208
10037, 10698, 10512,
11457, 11636, 12171
Onyx
10178, 10653, 10508,
10499
Megatron
MEI
10178
Opera
10037, 10714
10650
Plantron
10037
11037
Optimus
Orbit
Neckermann
NEI
10556, 10037
10037, 11037
11324
Playsonic
10037, 10714, 10715,
11652
Memorex
Mercury
Mermaid
10150, 10178, 11037
10037
10037
Orion
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 12001
Powerpoint
Prinston
10037, 10698
11037, 10715
NEO
10037
Netsat
10037
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Profitronic
Proline
Television
Rowa
Television
Siera
Television
Svasa
10037
10037, 10698
10556, 10037
10037
10208
10037, 10625, 10634,
11037
Saba
10625, 10714, 10560
10618
Silva
Swisstec
Sylvania
11614, 11775
Sagem
Saivod
Salora
Silva Schneider
Silver
10037
10171, 11394, 11864,
11886
Prosonic
10037, 10714, 10668,
11324, 11585, 11667,
11709, 12001
10037, 10668, 11037
10208, 12001
10715
Symphonic
Synco
10171, 11394
10178, 11755
11610
SilverCrest
Sinudyne
SKY
11037
Sampo
10178, 10171, 10650,
11755
10037
Protech
Proton
10037, 10668, 11037
10178
Syntax
Sysline
Tacico
Talent
10037, 10698
11324
Samsung
10178, 10556, 10037,
10618, 10650, 10208,
12051
10037
Skyworth
Sliding
ProVision
10556, 10037, 10714,
11324
10178
10178
SLX
10668
Pvision
Pye
12001
Sansui
Sanyo
10171, 10037, 10714,
11248, 12001
Tashiko
Tatung
TCL
10650
Solavox
Soniko
10037
10556, 10037
10208
10037, 11248, 11324
10037
Qingdao
Quasar
Quelle
11037, 10508, 10208,
11142, 11365, 11585,
11667, 11974
10698, 12403, 12434,
13183
Soniq
12493
10650
Sonitron
Sonneclair
Sonoko
Sonolor
Sontec
10208
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10512
TCM
10714, 12001
SBR
10556, 10037
10037
TEAC
10178, 10171, 10037,
10714, 10668, 11037,
10698, 10512, 11248,
11363, 11709, 11755
Schaub Lorenz
10714, 11324, 11363,
11667, 12001
R-Line
10037
10037
Radiola
10556, 10037
10037
10208
Schneider
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037
Radiomarelli
RadioShack
Radiotone
RCA
10037
10178, 10037
10037, 10668, 11037
Tec
10037
Sony
10810, 11505, 11167,
11651, 11825
Schoentech
Scotch
Scott
11037
Tech Line
Technica
Technics
Technika
TechniSat
Technisson
Techno
10037, 10668
11037
10178
Soundesign
Soundwave
Sowa
10178
10178, 11454, 10625,
10560, 10618, 11781,
12247, 12403, 12434,
12746, 12932
10178
10037, 11037, 10715
10178
10556, 10650
11667
Sears
10178, 10171
10634
Seaway
Seelver
SEG
Squareview
Standard
Starlite
10171
10556
Realistic
Recor
10178
11037
10037, 11037, 11709
10037
10714, 11652
11585
10037
10037, 10668, 11037,
12719
Rectiligne
Redstar
Reflex
10037
Strato
10037
Technosonic
10556, 10625, 10499,
11324
SEI
10037
10037
10178
10208
10037
SunBriteTV
Sungoo
11610
Sei-Sinudyne
Serie Dorada
Shanghai
Sharp
10037, 10668, 11037
11585
Techvision
Techwood
Tecnimagen
Teco
11709
11248
Relisys
Remotec
Reoc
11037, 11667
10556
Sunny
10037
10171, 10037
10714
Sunstar
10037
10650, 10818, 11165,
11423, 11659
10178, 10653
10208, 11709
10150
Sunstech
Sunwood
Supersonic
SuperTech
Supra
12001
Revox
10037
Tedelex
10037
Shintoshi
Shivaki
Siam
10037
RFT
10037
Teknika
10208
10178, 10037
10037
Roadstar
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037, 10715
TELE System
Telecor
11585
10556, 10037
10178
10037
Siemens
10037, 10195
Rolson
12001, 12098
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
Television
Television
Ultravox
UMC
Television
PVR
Telefunken
10037, 10625, 10714,
10560, 10698, 11585,
11667
10037
Wharfedale
10556, 10037, 11324,
11667
ReplayTV
Sonic Blue
TiVo
20616
20616
20739
11614, 11775
10037
White Westinghouse 10037
Unic Line
Uniden
Telefusion
Telegazi
Telemeister
Telesonic
Telestar
10037
Wilson
10556
12122
10037
Windsor
Windy Sam
Wintel
10668, 11037
10556
TV/VCR Combination
United
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 10715, 11652
10037
Amstrad
Ferguson
Fidelity
GoldStar
Grundig
LG
10171
10037
Unitek
11709
10714
10625
10556, 10037
10037, 10668, 11037
10037
Universal
Universum
10037, 10714
World-of-Vision
Wyse
12001
10171
Teletech
Teleview
Tennessee
Tensai
10037, 10668, 10195,
11037, 10618, 10512
11365
10037
Xenius
10634
10556, 10037, 10195
10178
10037
Univox
10037
Xiahua
10698
10037, 11037, 10715
V7 Videoseven
Vestel
11666, 11755
XLogic
10698
Mitsubishi
Philips
Radiola
Saba
10556
Tesla
10556, 10037, 10714,
11037, 11652
10037, 10668, 11037,
11585, 11667
Xrypton
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
10037
10556, 10037
10556
10650, 11576
10037
Tevion
10556, 10037, 10714,
10668, 11037, 11248,
11585, 11667
Vexa
10037
10625
Victor
10650, 10653, 11428
10037, 10508
10037
10037
Sanyo
11974
Videocon
VideoSystem
Vidtech
Viewsonic
Vision
Yoko
10037
Schneider
Sharp
10556, 10037
10818
Thomson
Thorn
10037, 10625, 10560
10037, 10499, 10512
10499
YU-MA-TU
Zenith
10037
10178
10178, 10037, 11365,
11423, 12358
Siemens
Sony
10037
Thorn-Ferguson
TMK
11365, 11755, 12049
10037
11505
10178
Zepto
Zonda
11585
10698
TEAC
10178, 10171
10556
Tokai
10037, 10668, 11037
11037
Vistron
Vivax
11363
Technics
Thomson
Tokaido
Topline
Toshiba
11709
10625
10668, 11037
Vizio
11758, 12209
10037
VCR
10195, 11037, 10618,
10650, 10508, 11169,
11508, 11524, 11652,
12203
Vortec
DirecTV
Humax
20739
20739
20616
20739
20616
20616
20739
DVD
Voxson
VU
10178, 10037
11365, 12098
11667
3D LAB
Accurian
Acoustic Solutions
AEG
30539
Panasonic
Philips
30675
Toyoda
11709
Walker
Waltham
Wansa
30713
TRANS-continents
10556, 10037, 10668,
11037
10037, 10668, 11037
12098
ReplayTV
Sonic Blue
TiVo
30675
AFK
31152
Transonic
10037, 10698, 10512,
11363
Wards
10178
Aiwa
30533
Watson
10037, 10714, 10668,
11037
Akai
30675
Triad
10556
PVR
Alba
30539, 30713
33052
Trio
11248
Wega
10037
DirecTV
Humax
Panasonic
Philips
20739
20739
20616
20739
Ambiance
Amstrad
Anthem
Triumph
TVTEXT 95
Uher
10556, 10037
10556
Welltech
Weltstar
10714, 11652
11037
30713
32820
10037
Westinghouse
11755
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
DVD
DVD
DVD
DVD
Aristona
ASDA
30539, 30646
32213
30713
30713
32587
30713
31571
30713
30571
30713
30503
30713
31152
Elfunk
30713
Kennex
Kenwood
Lenco
Lexicon
LG
30713
Orion
30713
30713
30713
30713
Elite
31152
30490, 30534
30713, 33052
32545
Ormond
Pacific
Audix
Emerson
EuroLine
Ferguson
Finlux
30675, 32213
30675
Autovox
Awa
Palladium
Panasonic
30713
30741, 31602
33052
30503, 30490, 31579,
31641, 32523, 32710,
32859
Basic Line
Bel Canto Design
Black Diamond
Blue Parade
Blue Sky
Brandt
30741
Limit
Firstline
Foehn & Hirsch
Funai
30713
Lodos
Loewe
30713
Pelican Accessories
Philco
30533
30675
33052
30539, 30741, 32474,
32783
30675
Philips
30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31340,
31354, 32056, 32084,
32434, 32689
Logik
30713
GE
30522
Lumatron
Lunatron
Luxman
Luxor
30741, 30713
30741
GFM
30675
Bush
Global Sphere
Go Video
GoldStar
Goodmans
GPX
31152
30573
Pioneer
30571, 30142, 30631,
31571, 32442, 32860
C-Tech
30741
30713
California Audio Labs 30490
30741
Polk Audio
Presidian
ProAudio
Proscan
Proson
30539
Magnavox
30503, 30539, 30646,
30675, 30713, 31354
Cambridge Audio
Centrum
Changhong
Cinetec
32808
30713, 31152
30741
30675
30675, 30713
30627
Manhattan
Marantz
30713
31394
Grandin
Grundig
H & B
30713
30539, 32414, 32432,
33444
30522
30713
30539, 30713
30713
30713
Clatronic
Clayton
30675
Mark
30713
Pye
30539, 30646
30741
30713
Haaz
31152
Matsui
30713
Radionette
Radiotone
RCA
Crown
30713
Hanseatic
Harman/Kardon
Henss
30741
Maxim
MDS
30713
30713
Dantax
30539, 30713
30582, 31229, 33228
30713
30713
30522, 30571, 32213,
32587
Denon
30490, 30634, 31634,
32258, 32748
Medion
Memorex
Metz
30630, 30741
32213
Hitachi
30573, 30713, 31664
30713
REC
30490
32213
31394
30713
30623
30741
Dick Smith
Electronics
31152
Hoeher
30571, 30713
30503, 30539
30539
Red
HotMedia
Humax
31152
Micromedia
Micromega
Microsoft
Minax
Redstar
Roadstar
Rotel
Digihome
DigiLogic
Digix Media
Disney
30713
30646
30713
Inno Hit
Insignia
30713
30522, 32083
30713
31394
30741, 30675, 32428,
32596
Salora
Samsung
30675
Mitsubishi
Momitsu
NAD
30713
30490, 30573, 30199,
30820, 31635, 32069,
32329, 32489, 33195
DSE
30675, 31152
30713
Integra
30503, 30571, 30627,
31612, 31634, 32147
33052
Dual
30741
Durabrand
Dynex
30675, 30713
32596
Irradio
JVC
30646
Sanyo
30713
NEC
30741, 31602
30503, 30539, 30623,
30867, 31597, 31602,
32855
Schneider
Schoentech
Scott
30539, 30646, 30713
30713
Onkyo
30503, 30627, 31612,
32147, 30571, 31634
Dyon
33052
eBench
31152
31394
Kendo
30713
Oppo
30575, 32545
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
DVD
SEG
DVD
Blu-ray Disc
JVC
DVD-R
Irradio
JVC
30713
30503
Toshiba
30503, 31639, 32277,
32551, 32705, 33157
32855
30646
Semp
Sharp
Lenco
33052
31597
Transonic
TVE
31394
30630, 30675, 30713,
32250, 32474, 32652,
32869
Lexicon
LG
32545
LG
30741
30713
30741, 31602
33052
Loewe
Magnavox
Medion
Panasonic
30741
United
30675, 30713, 31152
30741, 30713
30503
Limit
30646, 30675
30741
Sherwood
Shinsonic
Silva Schneider
SilverCrest
Skantic
30741, 33052
30533
Universum
Urban Concepts
Vestel
Loewe
32474, 32783
30675
Magnavox
Marantz
Momitsu
Onkyo
30490, 31579, 32523,
32710, 32859
30741
30713
32414, 32432, 33444
33052
31152
Victor
31597
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
30646, 31340
30631, 32860
30646
30539, 30713
31152
Vizio
32563
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501
SM Electronic
Smart
Vtrek
32587
30713
Waltham
Wellington
Weltstar
Wharfedale
Windsor
Windy Sam
Xbox
30713
RCA
30522
Sony
30533, 30864, 31033,
31070, 31431, 31516,
31633, 32180
Oppo
32545
30713
Samsung
Schneider
Sharp
30490, 31635
30646
Panasonic
Philips
31641, 32523, 32859
32084, 32434, 32689
30142, 32442
30199, 33195
32250, 32474, 32652
33052
30713
30713
30630, 30675, 32869
Soundwave
Star Clusters
Strato
30713
31152
31152
30713
31152
30630, 30675
30675
31394
30713
30741
30741
32587
30741
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
30713
Sony
31033, 31070, 31431,
31516, 31633, 32180
30573
Sylvania
Targa
30675
30522, 32083
31152
Strong
Sherwood
Sony
30741
XLogic
Supervision
Sylvania
Symphonic
Tamashi
Tandberg
Targa
31516, 32180
30675
Toshiba
Victor
31639, 32277, 32551
31597
Yamaha
30490, 30539, 30646,
30817, 31354, 32298,
32299
Sylvania
TASCAM
Toshiba
Vizio
34004
Yamaha
Zenith
30646
Zenith
30503, 30741
32551, 32705, 33157
32563
30741
Blu-ray Disc
Ambiance
Anthem
HD-DVD
Integra
LG
Yamaha
32298, 32299
Tchibo
33052
32901, 33104, 33504
30741
TCL
32820
DVD-R
Accurian
Aristona
Denon
TCM
Cambridge Audio
Denon
32808
30675
30646
30490
30675
30675
30741
30741
31664
30646
Microsoft
Onkyo
Xbox
32083
TEAC
34004, 30571, 30741,
30675, 31394
32258, 32748
33052
32901, 33104 33504
32083
Dyon
Technica
Technics
30713
30490
30713
30713
30571
30522
Foehn & Hirsch
Funai
33052
Emerson
Funai
30675
TV/DVD Combination
Techwood
Teletech
Harman/Kardon
Insignia
33228
Akai
11675
Go Video
GPX
30675, 32428, 32596
Black Diamond
Blue Sky
Bush
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
Theta Digital
Thomson
Integra
32147, 32900, 32910,
33100, 33101, 33500,
33501
Hitachi
Humax
11037, 10698, 12719,
30713
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Codes
TV/DVD Combination
TV/DVD Combination
Centrum
Crown
DMTech
Dual
11037, 30713
Sunstech
Sylvania
12001
11037, 30713
12001
10171, 11394, 11864,
11886, 30630, 30675
TEAC
10698
11037, 30713
12049
Technica
Telefunken
Teletech
Thomson
Toshiba
United
11037, 30713
10698
Dynex
Elfunk
Emerson
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
10625
11394, 11864, 11886,
30675
Ferguson
Goodmans
Grandin
Grundig
H & B
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
30713
11524
11037, 30713
30713
Universum
Vestel
30539
11037
12001
Viewsonic
Weltstar
12049
Hanseatic
Hitachi
Insignia
JVC
12001
11037, 30713
11037, 11667, 30713
12049
12271
LG
11423
Logik
11037, 30713
11037, 30713
12372
Luxor
Magnavox
Matsui
11037, 30713
12719
Medion
Nordmende
Odys
12001
12719
Panasonic
Philips
12170
11454, 10556, 11394,
30539
Powerpoint
Prosonic
Pvision
RCA
10698
12001
12001
12746, 12932
12001
Schaub Lorenz
SEG
11037, 12719, 30713
10818
Sharp
Soniq
12493
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
